PROJECT MANUAL:

ASCENSION COUNSELING CENTER ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS

1112 S. EAST ASCENSION COMPLEX BOULEVARD

GONZALES, LOUISIANA 70737

PROJECT NO. ENG-12-061

OWNER:

Tommy Martinez Parish President

Kenneth Dawson

Chief Administrative Officer

Kim Braud Chief Executive Assistant

Parish Council:

Oliver Joseph District 1 Councilman Kent Schexnaydre District 2 Councilman Travis Turner District 3 Councilman Daniel "Doc" Satterlee District 4 Councilman Dempsey Lambert District 5 Councilman Randy Clouatre District 6 Councilman Chris Loar-Chair District 7 Councilman Teri Casso District 8 Councilman Todd Lambert District 9 Councilman Bryan Melancon District 10 Councilman Benny Johnson District 11 Councilman

DATE:

AUGUST 14, 2014

ARCHITECT:

TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ADV Advertisement for Bids IB Instructions to Bidders B Louisiana Uniform Public Work Bid Form AIA-A310 Bid Bond AC Attestations Affidavit AIA-A101 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor AIA-A312 Performance Bond AIA-A312 Payment Bond NCA Non-Collusion Affidavit ID I.D. of Bidder/Corporate Resolution TE Tax Exempt Certificate NA Notice of Award NP Notice to Proceed SOV Schedule of Values AIA-G701 Change Order AIA-G704 Certificate of Substantial Completion RA Recommendation of Acceptance PO Partial Occupancy AIA-A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction SC Supplementary Conditions DIVISION 01 GENERAL CONDITIONS 01000 General Requirements 01010 Summary of Work 01027 Applications for Payment 01035 Modification Procedures 01040 Coordination 01045 Cutting and Patching 01090 Reference Standards 01101 Alternates 01300 Submittals 01312 Project Meetings 01400 Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Temporary Facilities 01600 Materials and Equipment 01630 Substitutions 01650 Project Record Documents 01700 Contract Closeout DIVISION 02 SITEWORK 02100 Site Preparation 02211 Rough Grading 02212 Finish Grading

02212 Finish Grading 02222 Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting for Utilities and Pavement 02250 Minor Demolition 02361 Termite Control 02600 Concrete Paving 02622 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping 02710 Storm Drainage System Appurtenances DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION 04 MASONRY 04100 Masonry Mortar and Grout 04202 Brick Veneer DIVISION 05 METALS 05500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTIC 06100 Rough Carpentry 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry 06200 Finish Carpentry DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07120 Fluid Applied Waterproofing 07160 Damp-Proofing 07190 Vapor Retarder 07210 Building Insulation 07250 Weather Barriers 07311 Asphalt Shingle Roofing System 07631 Flashing and Sheet Metal Gutters 07840 Firestopping 07900 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08111 Standard Steel Doors and Frames 08211 Flush Wood Doors 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08710 Door Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09260 Gypsum Board Systems

09300 Wall Tile 09511 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09650 Resilient Flooring 09680 Carpet 09900 Painting DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10155 Toilet Compartments 10426 Signage and Graphics 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 10800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Not Used DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL

Not Used DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Not Used

DIVISION 00

BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Parish of Ascension www.ascensionparish.net

TOMMY MARTINEZ ASCENSION PARISH PRESIDENT

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Sealed bids will be received by Ascension Parish Government Purchasing Department, 120 East Railroad Street, Gonzales, Louisiana 70737 (P.O. Box 2392, Gonzales, Louisiana 70707) on Thursday, September 16, 2014, 2:00 P.M. local time from Commercial Building Contractors, and then at said office publicly opened and read aloud for construction of the project described as follows:

Ascension Parish Counseling Center – Additions and Renovations

General Scope of Project: Renovations and Expansion to the Ascension Parish Counseling Center located at 1112 S. East Ascension Complex Blvd., Gonzales, Louisiana 70737. The project includes approximately 650 square feet of addition and approximately 375 square feet of renovated area. The building addition will provide needed space to the Parish Counseling Center while the renovation will create the needed separation between the Parish Counseling Center and the Gonzales Mental Health Clinic.

All bids must be in accordance with the Bid Documents and any bid received after 2:00 p.m. on the day and date of the bid opening will be returned unopened. Properly Licensed Louisiana Contractors may obtain copies of the BID DOCUMENTS up to 24 hours prior to bid time. Complete Bid Documents, prepared by Fusion Architecture, apc, dated August 14, 2014, for this project are available in paper format and may be obtained from the architect, Fusion Architecture, 3488 Brentwood Drive, Suite 101, Baton Rouge, LA 70809 upon payment of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) per set. Bid documents may be reviewed for free at Fusion Architecture, address above. According to Act No. 478, July 9, 1988, Section 1, R.S. 38:22:12: Deposits on the first set of documents furnished to bona fide prime bidders will be fully refunded upon return of the documents no later than ten (10) Days after receipt of bids. On other sets of documents furnished to bidders, the deposits less actual cost of reproduction will be refunded upon return of the documents no later than ten (10) day after receipt of bids. No refund will be given to contractor that has been awarded the project. No refund will be made to non-bidders or sub-bidders. ALL PLANS MUST BE RETURNED IN GOOD CONDITION, COMPLETE WITH ADDENDA, IN GOOD CONDITION TO QUALIFY FOR REFUND. Questions about this procedure shall be directed to the Architect at: Fusion Architecture, apc 3488 Brentwood Drive, Suite 101 Baton Rouge, LA 70809 Telephone: 225-766-4848 Fax: 225-766-4724 Bids from only the respective contractors obtaining plans, must be submitted on proposal forms provided by Fusion Architecture. Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the name of the bidder, his/her address, contractors state license number and the name of the project for which the bid is submitted. If forwarded by mail or hand delivery the sealed envelope containing the bid must be enclosed in another envelope addressed to the following: VIA U.S. Mail Ascension Parish Government Purchasing Department

Sealed Bid: Ascension Parish Counseling Center – Additions and Renovations P.O. Box 2392 Gonzales, LA 70707

Hand Delivery 120 East Railroad Gonzales, LA 70737 Ascension Parish Counseling Center – Additions and Renovations Contractor Name:_________________________________________ LA State Contractor License Number:__________________________

RS 38:2218. Evidence of good faith; countersigning To address the above requirement for electronic bids Ascension Parish Government will allow electronic bids submitted via the parish approved on-line bid site to be submitted as follows:

A. A copy of the bid bond, certified check, or cashier's check, must be attached to bid document submitted electronically

B. The original bid bond document, certified check, or cashier's check, must be received in our office no later than 48 hours after bid opening date and time (Ascension Parish Purchasing Department, P.O. Box 2392, Gonzales, Louisiana 70707 – Physical; 120 East Railroad Street, Gonzales, Louisiana 70737) C. The bid-bond, certified check, or cashier's check, envelope must be clearly labeled as a “Bid Bond” with the project name, vendor’s name as it appears on the bid documents and address.

Beginning at 2:00 p.m., September 16, 2014 all bids will be downloaded. No bids are accepted after 2:00 p.m. All addenda, Amendments, Letters of Clarification, and Withdrawal Notices will be posted online. Construction proposal information may be accessed via the internet at www.centralauctionhouse.com Users must click on Login and create a new user registration to view and download plans and specifications. Once logged in, users must click on Ascension Parish Government to view current advertisement listings. This listing is titled “Ascension Parish Counseling Center – Additions and Renovations”. Registered users will have access to view Project Information, submit a question concerning the project, and view the plans. All project specific notices are found here. It will be the responsibility of the bidder to check for updates. All submitted questions will be forwarded by email to the Project Manager and the Project Engineer for a response. Ascension Parish shall not be responsible if the bidder cannot complete and submit a bid due to failure or incomplete delivery of the files submitted via the internet

Bid security in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Total Bid must accompany each Bid, and shall be made payable to the Owner. A mandatory Pre-Bid Conference will be held on Wednesday, September 3, 2014 at 2:00 PM at the job site: 1112 S. East Ascension Complex Blvd., Gonzales, Louisiana 70737. Contractors should have obtained a set of plans and specifications prior to this time. Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis stated in the Instructions to Bidders. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 45 days after bid opening except as provided by law. Bidders must meet the requirements of the State of Louisiana Contractor’s Licensing Law, R.S. 37:2151 et seq. Bidders must comply with provisions of R.S. 38:2212.10. The designers’ construction cost estimate and Parish budget will be read aloud upon opening of the bids. The Parish of Ascension reserves the right to disqualify any Bid , response to a Request for Qualifications, or Request for Proposals if it is determined that the submitting business entity is not in good standing with the Louisiana Secretary of State or is not authorized to do business in the State of Louisiana. Ascension Parish Government reserves the right to reject any and all bids for just cause. Ascension Parish Government Tommy Martinez, Parish President CHIEF - Please publish 8/21/14, 8/28/14, 9/04/14 ADVOCATE - Please publish 8/21/14, 8/28/14, 9/04/14 WEEKLY- Please publish 8/21/14, 8/28/14, 9/04/14

2013 IB -1

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS COMPLETION TIME: The Bidder shall agree to fully complete the contract within (one hundred and twenty) 120 consecutive calendar days, subject to such extensions as may be granted under Paragraph 8.3, in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions, and acknowledges that this construction time will start on or before the date specified in the written “Notice to Proceed” from the Owner. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: The Bidder shall agree to pay as Liquidated Damages the amount of Two Hundred and Fifty Dollars ($250.00) for each consecutive calendar day for which the work is not complete, beginning with the first day beyond the contract completion date stated on the “Notice to Proceed” or as amended by change order.

ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 1.1 The Bid Documents include the following:

Advertisement for Bids Instructions to Bidders Bid Form Bid Bond General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AlA Document A201, 2007 Edition Supplementary Conditions Contract Between Owner and Contractor and Performance and Payment Bond Affidavit Change Order Form Partial Occupancy Form Recommendation of Acceptance Other Documents (if applicable) Specifications & Drawings Addenda issued during the bid period and acknowledged in the Bid Form

1.2 All definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AlA Document A201 and the Supplementary Conditions are applicable to the Bid Documents. 1.3 Addenda are written and/or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the opening of bids which modify or interpret the Bid Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, corrections and prior approvals.

1.4 A bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein supported by data called for by the Bid Documents. 1.5 Base bid is the sum stated in the bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the work described as the base, to which work may be added, or deleted for sums stated in alternate bids. 1.6 An alternate bid (or alternate) is an amount stated in the bid to be added to the amount of the base bid if the corresponding change in project scope or materials or methods of construction described in the Bid Documents is accepted. 1.7 A Bidder is one who submits a bid for a prime Contract with the Owner for the work described in the Bid Documents. 1.8 A Sub-bidder is one who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials and/or labor for a portion of the work. 1.9 Where the word "Architect" is used in any of the documents, it shall refer to the Prime Designer of the project, regardless of discipline.

ARTICLE 2 PRE-BID CONFERENCE 2.1 The purpose of the Pre-Bid Conference is to familiarize Bidders with the requirements of the Project and the intent of the Bid Documents, and to receive comments and information from interested Bidders. If the Pre-Bid Conference is stated in the

2013 IB -2

Advertisement for Bids to be a Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference, bids shall be accepted only from those bidders who attend the Pre-Bid Conference. Contractors who are not in attendance for the entire Pre-Bid Conference will be considered to have not attended. 2.2 Any revision of the Bid Documents made as a result of the Pre-Bid Conference shall not be valid unless included in an addendum. ARTICLE 3 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION 3.1 Each Bidder by making his bid represents that: 3.1.1 He has read and understands the Bid Documents and his bid is made in accordance therewith. 3.1.2 He has visited the site and has familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the work is to be performed. 3.1.3 His bid is based solely upon the materials, systems and equipment described in the Bid Documents as advertised and as modified by addenda. 3.1.4 His bid is not based on any verbal instructions contrary to the Bid Documents and addenda. 3.1.5 He is familiar with Code of Governmental Ethics requirement that prohibits public servants and/or their immediate family members from bidding on or entering into contracts; he is aware that the Designer and its principal owners are considered Public Servants under the Code of Governmental Ethics for the limited purposes and scope of the Design Contract with the Parish on this Project (see Ethics Board Advisory Opinion, No. 2009-378 and 2010-128); and neither he nor any principal of the Bidder with a controlling interest therein has an immediate family relationship with the Designer or any principal within the Designer’s firm. (see La. R.S. 42:1113). Any Bidder submitting a bid in violation of this clause shall be disqualified and any contract entered into in violation of this clause shall be null and void.

3.2 The Bidder must be fully qualified under any State or local licensing law for Contractors in effect at the time and at the location of the work before submitting his bid. In the State of Louisiana, Revised Statutes 37:2150, et seq. will be considered, if applicable. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining that all of his Sub-bidders or prospective Subcontractors are duly licensed in accordance with law. ARTICLE 4 BID DOCUMENTS 4.1 Copies 4.1.1 Bid Documents may be obtained from the Architect for a deposit as stated in the Advertisement for Bids. The deposit will be refunded as stated in the Advertisement for Bids. No deposits will be refunded on Bid Documents returned later than ten days after receipt of bids. 4.1.1.2 As an alternative method of distribution, the Bid Documents may be provided in electronic format. They may be obtained as stated in the Advertisement for Bids. 4.1.1.2.1 If electronic distribution is available, paper copies will not be provided. 4.1.2 Complete sets of Bid Documents shall be used in preparing bids; neither the Owner nor the Architect assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bid Documents. 4.1.3 The Owner or Architect in making copies of the Bid Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining bids on the work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 4.2 Interpretation or Correction of Bid Documents 4.2.1 Bidders shall promptly notify the Architect of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error which they may discover upon examination of the Bid Documents or of the site and local conditions.

2013 IB -3

4.2.2 Bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bid Documents shall make a written request to the Architect, to reach him at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of bids. 4.2.3 Any interpretation, correction or change of the Bid Documents will be made by addendum. Interpretations, corrections or changes of the Bid Documents made in any other manner will not be binding and Bidders shall not rely upon such interpretations, corrections and changes. 4.3 Substitutions 4.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bid Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. No substitutions shall be allowed after bids are received. 4.3.2 No substitution will be considered unless written request for approval has been submitted by the Proposer and has been received by the Architect at least seven (7) working days prior to the opening of bids. (RS38:2295C) Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including model numbers, drawings, cuts, performance and test data and any other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment or work that incorporation of the substitute would require shall be included. It shall be the responsibility of the proposer to include in his proposal all changes required of the Bid Documents if the proposed product is used. Prior approval is given contingent upon supplier being responsible for any costs which may be necessary to modify the space or facilities needed to accommodate the materials and equipment approved. 4.3.3 If the Architect approves any proposed substitution, such approval will be set forth in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 4.4 Addenda 4.4.1 Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the Architect to have received a complete set of Bid Documents.

4.4.2 Copies of addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bid Documents are on file for that purpose. 4.4.3 Except as described herein, addenda shall not be issued within a period of seventy-two (72) hours prior to the advertised time for the opening of bids, excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and any other legal holidays. If the necessity arises of issuing an addendum modifying plans and specifications within the seventy-two (72) hour period prior to the advertised time for the opening of bids, then the opening of bids shall be extended at least seven but no more than twenty-one (21) working days, without the requirement of re-advertising. Facility Planning shall be consulted prior to issuance of such an addendum and shall approve such issuance. The revised time and date for the opening of bids shall be stated in the addendum. 4.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain from the Architect prior to submitting his bid that he has received all addenda issued, and he shall acknowledge their receipt on the Bid Form. 4.4.5 The Owner shall have the right to extend the bid date by up to (30) thirty days without the requirement of re-advertising. Any such extension shall be made by addendum issued by the Architect. ARTICLE 5 BID PROCEDURE 5.1 Form and Style of Bids 5.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the Louisiana Uniform Public Work Bid Form provided in the Project Manual. 5.1.2 All blanks on the Bid Form shall be filled in manually in ink or typewritten. 5.1.3 Bid sums shall be expressed in both words and figures, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the written words shall govern. 5.1.4 Any interlineation, alteration or erasure must be initialed by the signer of the bid or his authorized representative.

2013 IB -4

5.1.5 Bidders are cautioned to complete all alternates should such be required in the Bid Form. Failure to submit alternate prices will render the bid non responsive and shall cause its rejection. 5.1.6 Bidders are cautioned to complete all unit prices should such be required in the Bid Form. Unit prices represent a price proposal to do a specified quantity and quality of work. Unit prices are incorporated into the base bid but are not the sole components thereof. 5.1.7 Bidders are strongly cautioned to ensure that all blanks on the bid form are completely and accurately filled in. 5.1.8 Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the Bid Form nor qualify his bid in any other manner. 5.1.9 The bid shall include the legal name of Bidder and shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a Contract. The authority of the signature of the person submitting the bid shall be deemed sufficient and acceptable under any of the following conditions: (a) Signature on bid is that of any corporate officer or member of a partnership or partnership in commendam listed on most current annual report on file with Secretary of State. (b) Signature on bid is that of authorized representative of corporation, partnership, or other legal entity and bid is accompanied by corporate resolution, certification as to the corporate principal, or other documents indicating authority. (c) Corporation, partnership, or other legal entity has filed in the records of the Secretary of State, an affidavit, resolution or other acknowledged or authentic document indicating the names of all parties authorized to submit bids for public contracts. A bid submitted by an agency shall have a current Power of Attorney attached certifying agent's authority to bind Bidder. The name and license number on the envelope shall be the same as the entity identified on the Bid Form. 5.1.10 On any bid in excess of fifty thousand dollars ($50,000.00), the Contractor shall certify that he is licensed under R.S. 37: 2150-2173 and show his license number on the bid above his signature or his duly authorized representative.

5.2 Bid Security 5.2.1 No bid shall be considered or accepted unless the bid is accompanied by bid security in an amount of five percent (5.0%) of the base bid and all alternates. The bid security shall be in the form of a certified check or cashier's check drawn on a bank insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, or a Bid Bond written by a surety company licensed to do business in Louisiana and signed by the surety's agent or attorney-in-fact. The Bid Bond shall be written on the Bid Bond Form, and the surety for the bond must meet the qualifications stated thereon. The Bid Bond shall include the legal name of the bidder be in favor of the Parish of Ascension, and shall be accompanied by appropriate power of attorney. The Bid Bond must be signed by both the bidder/principal and the surety in the space provided on the Bid Bond Form. Failure by the bidder/principal or the surety to sign the bid bond shall result in the rejection of the bid. Bid security furnished by the Contractor shall guarantee that the Contractor will, if awarded the work according to the terms of his proposal, enter into the Contract and furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by these Bid Documents, within ten (10) days after written notice that the instrument is ready for his signature. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as penalty. 5.2.2 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that bids may be withdrawn, or (c) all bids have been rejected. 5.3 Submission of Bids 5.3.1 The Bid shall be sealed in an opaque envelope. The bid envelope shall be identified on the outside with the name of the project, and the name, address, and license number of the Bidder. The envelope shall contain only one bid form and will be received until the time specified and at the place specified in the Advertisement for Bids. It shall be the specific responsibility of the Bidder to deliver his sealed bid to Parish of Ascension at the

2013 IB -5

appointed place and prior to the announced time for the opening of bids. Late delivery of a bid for any reason, including late delivery by United States Mail, or express delivery, shall disqualify the bid. If the bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof. Such bids shall be sent by Registered or Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested, addressed to:

Parish of Ascension P. 0. Box 2392 Gonzales, Louisiana, 70707

Bids sent by express delivery shall be delivered to: Parish of Ascension

120 East Railroad Avenue Gonzales, Louisiana 70737

5.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time on the date for receipt of bids indicated in the Advertisement for Bids, or any extension thereof made by addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of bids will be returned unopened. 5.3.3 Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at location designated for receipt of bids. 5.3.4 Oral, telephonic or telegraphic bids are invalid and shall not receive consideration. Owner shall not consider notations written on outside of bid envelope which have the effect of amending the bid. Written modifications enclosed in the bid envelope, and signed or initialed by the Contractor or his representative, shall be accepted. 5.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid 5.4.1 A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the time stipulated in the Advertisement for Bids, for the period following the time and bid date designated for the receipt of bids, and Bidder so agrees in submitting his bid, except in accordance with R.S. 38:2214 which states, in part, "Bids containing patently obvious mechanical, clerical or mathematical errors may be withdrawn by the Contractor if clear and convincing sworn, written evidence of such errors is furnished

to the public entity within forty eight hours of the Bid Opening excluding Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays". 5.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of bids, bids submitted early may be modified or withdrawn only by notice to the party receiving bids at the place and prior to the time designated for receipt of bids. 5.4.3 Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 5.4.4 Bid Security shall be in an amount sufficient for the bid as modified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 6 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6.1 Opening of Bids 6.1.1 The properly identified Bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud, and a tabulation abstract of the amounts of the base bids and alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders. 6.2 Rejection of Bids 6.2.1 The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all bids and in particular to reject a bid not accompanied by any required bid security or data required by the Bid Documents or a bid in any way incomplete or irregular. 6.3 Acceptance of Bid 6.3.2 It is the intent of the Owner, if he accepts any alternates, to accept them in the order in which they are listed in the Bid Form. Determination of the Low Bidder shall be on the basis of the sum of the base bid and the alternates accepted. However, the Owner shall reserve the right to accept alternates in any order which does not affect determination of the Low Bidder.

2013 IB -6

ARTICLE 7 POST-BID INFORMATION 7.1 Submissions 7.1.1 At the Pre-Construction Conference, the Contractor shall submit the following information to the Architect. 7.1.1.1 A designation of the work to be performed by the Contractor with his own forces. 7.1.1.2 A breakdown of the Contract cost attributable to each item listed in the Schedule of Values Form (attached). No payments will be made to the Contractor until this is received. 7.1.1.3 The proprietary names and the suppliers of principal items or systems of material and equipment proposed for the work. 7.1.1.4 A list of names and business domiciles of all Subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers or other persons or organizations (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the work. It is the preference of the Owner that, to the greatest extent possible or practical, the Contractor utilize Louisiana Subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and labor. 7.1.2 The Contractor will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect the reliability and responsibility of the proposed Subcontractors to furnish and perform the work described in the sections of the Specifications pertaining to such proposed Subcontractor's respective trades. The General Contractor shall be responsible for actions or inactions of Subcontractors and/or material suppliers. The General Contractor is totally responsible for any lost time or extra expense incurred due to a Subcontractor's/or Material Supplier's failure to perform. Failure to perform includes, but is not limited to, a Subcontractor's financial failure, abandonment of the project, failure to make prompt delivery, or failure to do work up to standard. Under no circumstances shall the Owner mitigate the General Contractor's losses or reimburse the General Contractor for losses caused by these events.

7.1.3 Subcontractors and other persons and organizations selected by the Bidder must be used on the work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written approval of the Owner and the Architect. 7.1.4 The lowest responsive and responsible bidder shall submit to the Architect and the Owner within ten days after the bid opening a letter/letters from the manufacturer stating that the manufacturer will issue the roof system guarantee complying with the requirements of Ascension Parish Government based on the specified roof system and include the name of the applicator acceptable to the manufacturer at the highest level of certification for installing the specified roof system. This manufacturer shall be one that has received prior approval or is named in the specifications. In accordance with La. R.S. 38:2227, LA. R.S. 38:2212.10 and LA. R.S. 23:1726(B) each bidder on this project must submit the completed Attestations Affidavit (Past Criminal Convictions of Bidders, Verification of Employees and Certification Regarding Unpaid Workers Compensation Insurance) form found within this bid package. The Attestations Affidavit form shall be submitted to Ascension Parish Government within 10 days after the opening of bids. ARTICLE 8 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND 8.1 Bond Required 8.1.1 The Contractor shall furnish and pay for a Performance and Payment Bond written by a company licensed to do business in Louisiana, which shall be signed by the surety's agent or attorney-in-fact, in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract amount. Surety must be listed currently on the U. S. Department of Treasury Financial Management Service List (Treasury List) as approved for an amount equal to or greater than the contract amount, or must be an insurance company domiciled in Louisiana or owned by Louisiana residents. If surety is qualified other than by listing on the Treasury list, the contract amount may not exceed fifteen percent of policyholders' surplus as shown by surety's most recent financial statements

2013 IB -7

filed with the Louisiana Department of Insurance and may not exceed the amount of $500,000. However, a Louisiana domiciled insurance company with at least an A- rating in the latest printing of the A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide shall not be subject to the $500,000 limitation, provided that the contract amount does not exceed ten percent of policyholders' surplus as shown in the latest A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide nor fifteen percent of policyholders' surplus as shown by surety's most recent financial statements filed with the Louisiana Department of Insurance. The Bond shall be signed by the surety's agent or attorney-in-fact. The Bond shall be in favor of Parish of Ascension. 8.2 Time of Delivery and Form of Bond 8.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bond to the Owner simultaneous with the execution of the Contract. 8.2.2 Bond shall be in the form furnished by Ascension Parish Government, entitled PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND, a copy of which is included in the Bid Documents. 8.2.3 The Bidder shall require the Attorney-in-Fact who executes the required bond on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of his power of Attorney.

ARTICLE 9 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 9.1 Form to be Used 9.1.1 Form of the Contract to be used shall be furnished by Ascension Parish Government, an example of which is bound in the Bid Documents. 9..2 Award 9.2.1 Before award of the Contract, the successful Bidder shall furnish to the Owner a copy of a Disclosure of Ownership Affidavit stamped by the Secretary of State, a certified copy of the minutes of the corporation or partnership meeting which

authorized the party executing the bid to sign on behalf of the Contractor. 9.2.2 In accordance with Louisiana Law, when the Contract is awarded, the successful Bidder shall, at the time of the signing of the Contract, execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit included in the Contract Documents

ARTICLE 10 TAX EXEMPTIONS 10.1 In accordance with Louisiana laws, relative to the Public Bid Law, certain purchases of material and supplies by certain Contractors and Subcontractors awarded public works Contracts by a public entity are exempt from local and State taxes on public works contracts by public entities. 10.2 Enclosed herein is form entitled Designation of Construction Contractor as Agent of Government Entity and Exemption Certificate. indicating the Designation of Agency as Parish of Ascension for the period of construction outlined in Contract. 10.3 This designation of agency form when properly executed by both the Contractor and the government entity, (Parish of Ascension) for the construction period. ARTICLE 11 PARTICIPATION BY DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES BUSINESS 11.1 The Owner strongly encourages the participation of DBE’s (Disadvantaged Business Enterprise) in all contracts or procurements let by the Owner of goods and service and labor and material. To that end, all contractors and suppliers are encouraged to utilize DBE business enterprises in the purchase or sub-contracting of materials, supplies, services, and labor and material in which disadvantaged businesses are available

LOUISIANA UNIFORM PUBLIC WORK BID FORM TO: Ascension Parish Government 208 E. Railroad Avenue Gonzales, LA 70737

BID FOR: Ascension Counseling Center Additions and Renovations Project No. ENG-12-061

The undersigned bidder hereby declares and represents that she/he; a) has carefully examined and understands the Bidding Documents, b) has not received, relied on, or based his bid on any verbal instructions contrary to the Bidding Documents or any addenda, c) has personally inspected and is familiar with the project site, and hereby proposes to provide all labor, materials, tools, appliances and facilities as required to perform, in a workmanlike manner, all work and services for the construction and completion of the referenced project, all in strict accordance with the Bidding Documents prepared by: Fusion Architecture, APC and dated: August 14, 2014

Bidders must acknowledge all addenda. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following ADDENDA: (Enter the number the

Designer has assigned to each of the addenda that the Bidder is acknowledging) __________________________________________ . TOTAL BASE BID: For all work required by the Bidding Documents (including any and all unit prices designated “Base Bid” * but not alternates) the sum of:

Dollars ($ ) ALTERNATES: For any and all work required by the Bidding Documents for Alternates including any and all unit prices designated as alternates in the unit price description. Alternate No. 1 (Owner to provide description of alternate and state whether add or deduct) for the lump sum of: N/A Dollars ($ ) Alternate No. 2 (Owner to provide description of alternate and state whether add or deduct) for the lump sum of: N/A Dollars ($ ) Alternate No. 3 (Owner to provide description of alternate and state whether add or deduct) for the lump sum of: N/A Dollars ($ ) NAME OF BIDDER:

ADDRESS OF BIDDER:

LOUISIANA CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE NUMBER:

NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER **:

DATE: _______________________

* The Unit Price Form shall be used if the contract includes unit prices. Otherwise it is not required and need not be included with the form. The number of unit prices that may be included is not limited and additional sheets may be included if needed. ** If someone other than a corporate officer signs for the Bidder/Contractor, a copy of a corporate resolution or other signature authorization shall be required for submission of bid. Failure to include a copy of the appropriate signature authorization, if required, may result in the rejection of the bid unless bidder has complied with La. R.S. 38:2212(A)(1)(c) or RS 38:2212(O) . BID SECURITY in the form of a bid bond, certified check or cashier’s check as prescribed by LA RS 38:2218.A is attached to and made a part of this bi

2013 Page 1 of 2

Ascension Counseling Center Additions and Renovations ENG-12-061 Name of Project Project No. STATE OF __________________________ PARISH OF _________________________

ATTESTATIONS AFFIDAVIT

Before me, the undersigned notary public, duly commissioned and qualified in and for the parish and state aforesaid, personally came and appeared Affiant, who after being duly sworn, attested as follows: LA. R.S. 38:2227 PAST CRIMINAL CONVICTIONS OF BIDDERS

A. No sole proprietor or individual partner, incorporator, director, manager, officer, organizer, or member who has a

minimum of a ten percent (10%) ownership in the bidding entity named below has been convicted of, or has entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any of the following state crimes or equivalent federal crimes: (a) Public bribery (R.S. 14:118) (c) Extortion (R.S. 14:66)

(b) Corrupt influencing (R.S. 14:120) (d) Money laundering (R.S. 14:23)

B. Within the past five years from the project bid date, no sole proprietor or individual partner, incorporator, director, manager, officer, organizer, or member who has a minimum of a ten percent (10%) ownership in the bidding entity named below has been convicted of, or has entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any of the following state crimes or equivalent federal crimes, during the solicitation or execution of a contract or bid awarded pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes:

(a) Theft (R.S. 14:67) (b) Identity Theft (R.S. 14:67.16) (c) Theft of a business record (R.S.14:67.20) (d) False accounting (R.S. 14:70) (e) Issuing worthless checks (R.S. 14:71)

(f) Bank fraud (R.S. 14:71.1) (g) Forgery (R.S. 14:72) (h) Contractors; misapplication of payments (R.S. 14:202) (i) Malfeasance in office (R.S. 14:134)

LA. R.S. 38:2212.10 Verification of Employees A. At the time of bidding, Appearer is registered and participates in a status verification system to verify that all new hires in the state of Louisiana are legal citizens of the United States or are legal aliens.

B. If awarded the contract, Appearer shall continue, during the term of the contract, to utilize a status verification

system to verify the legal status of all new employees in the state of Louisiana.

C. If awarded the contract, Appearer shall require all subcontractors to submit to it a sworn affidavit verifying compliance with Paragraphs (A) and (B) of this Subsection.

2013 Page 2 of 2

Ascension Counseling Center Additions and Renovations ENG-12-061 Name of Project Project No

LA. R.S. 23:1726(B) Certification Regarding Unpaid Workers Compensation Insurance

A. R.S. 23:1726 prohibits any entity against whom an assessment under Part X of Chapter 11 of Title 23 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950 (Alternative Collection Procedures & Assessments) is in effect, and whose right to appeal that assessment is exhausted, from submitting a bid or proposal for or obtaining any contract pursuant to Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950 and Chapters 16 and 17 of Title 39 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950.

B. By signing this bid /proposal, Affiant certifies that no such assessment is in effect against the bidding / proposing entity.

____________________________________ ________________________________________________ NAME OF BIDDER NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

____________________________________ _________________________________________________ DATE TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

__________________________________________________________

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER/AFFIANT

Sworn to and subscribed before me by Affiant on the _____ day of _____________ , 20___ .

_________________________________ Notary Public

Page 1 of 1

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT - CONTRACTOR

(R.S. 38:2224) STATE OF LOUISIANA PARISH OF ____________________ BE IT KNOWN, that on this __________ day of _______________, ______, before me the undersigned Notary Public, duly commissioned and qualified, within and for the Parish of _________________, State of Louisiana, personally came and appeared ______________________, as the duly authorized agent of ___________________________, who after being by me first duly sworn, did depose and say:

That _________________________________ has/have been selected as Contractor for the PROJECT NAME:___________________________________________________________; PROJECT NO. ___________________________ and that affiant employed no person, corporation, firm, association, or other organization, either directly or indirectly to secure the public contract under which he received payment, other than persons regularly employed by the affiant whose services in connection with the construction, alteration or demolition of the public building or project or in securing the public contract were in the regular course or their duties for affiant; and That no part of the contract price received by affiant was paid or will be paid to any person, corporation, firm, association, or other organization for soliciting the contract, other than the payment of their normal compensation to persons regularly employed by the affiant whose services in connection with the construction, alternation or demolition of the public building or project were in the regular course of their duties for affiant. APPEARER FURTHER DECLARES, that they will, in all respects, comply with the public contract laws of the State of Louisiana, including Title 38 of the Louisiana Statutes, and particularly Section 2224, as amended, of such Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes.

WITNESSES: ______________________________ ______________________________ BY: __________________________ Sworn to and subscribed before me this ___________ day of ________________, 2014. ______________________________ Notary Public

Ascension Counseling Center Additions and Renovations I.D. of Bidder/Corporate Resolution ENG-12-061 Page 1

I.D. of Bidder/Corporate Resolution

PROJECT TITLE: Ascension Parish Governmental Complex BIDDER IS:

INDIVIDUAL By:

(Signature Individual)

Name:

Doing business as:

Business Address:

Telephone No.:

PARTNERSHIP

Firm Name:

By:

(Signature of General Partner)

General Partner(s) Name:

Business Address:

Telephone No.:

CORPORATION

Corporation Name:

State of Incorporation:

By:

(Signature -attach evidence of authority to sign)

Name of person authorized to sign:

Business Address:

Telephone No.:

**(Corporate Resolution (PAGE 00320-3) Must Be Attached)

Ascension Counseling Center Additions and Renovations I.D. of Bidder/Corporate Resolution ENG-12-061 Page 2

BIDDER IS:

LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY

Company Name:

By:

(Signature -attach evidence of authority to sign)

Member Name:

Business Address:

Telephone No.:

JOINT VENTURE

Member(s) Name:

Address:

Member(s) Name:

Address:

Ascension Counseling Center Additions and Renovations I.D. of Bidder/Corporate Resolution ENG-12-061 Page 3

IF BID IS BY A CORPORATION, THE CORPORATION RESOLUTION (PAGE 00320-3) MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID.

CORPORATE RESOLUTION

BE IT RESOLVED by the Board of Directors of

, a Corporation organized under the laws of the State of ,and

domiciled in the city of , that

_________________________ President of the Corporation and/or

_______________________________ of the Corporation, be, and are hereby

authorized and empowered to submit bids and to execute any and all contracts of

whatever kind on behalf of the Corporation and to do all things necessary in the

premises.

The following resolution was offered, duly seconded and, after discussion, was

unanimously adopted by said quorum:

CERTIFICATE

I, , Secretary of

_______________________ do hereby certify that the foregoing resolution is

a true and exact copy unanimously adopted by the Board of Directors of said

Corporation at a meeting thereof legally held on the day of

, 20__, that said resolution is duly entered into the records of said corporation;

that it has not been rescinded or modified; and that it is now in full force and

effect.

IN TESTIMONY THEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and the seal of said

corporation this _________ day of _____________________ , 20___

Secretary

Ascension Counseling Center Additions and Renovations I.D. of Bidder/Corporate Resolution ENG-12-061 Page 4

Ascension Counseling Center Additions and Renovations Notice of Award ENG-12-061 Page 1

NOTICE OF AWARD TO: ___ _____ ___ _______ PROJECT Description: Ascension Counseling Center Additions and Renovations The OWNER has considered the BID submitted by you for the above described WORK in response to its Invitation for Bids dated ____________, and Information for Bidders. You are hereby notified that your BID has been accepted for items in the amount of $ . You are required by the Information for Bidders to execute the Agreement and furnish the required CONTRACTOR'S Performance BOND, Payment BOND and certificates of insurance within ten (10) calendar days from the date of this Notice to you. If you fail to execute said Agreement and to furnish said BONDS within ten (10) days from the date of this Notice, said OWNER will be entitled to consider all your rights arising out of the OWNER's acceptance of your BID as abandoned and as a forfeiture of your BID BOND. The OWNER will be entitled to such other rights as may be granted by law. You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this NOTICE OF AWARD to the OWNER.

Dated this day of , 20 .

Ascension Parish Government Owner

By: ________________________________ Tommy Martinez Title: Parish President

ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE

Receipt of the above NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby acknowledged By this the day of , 20 . By Title

Ascension Counseling Center Additions and Renovations Notice of Award ENG-12-061 Page 1

NOTICE TO PROCEED

TO: DATE: Project: You are hereby notified to commence WORK in accordance with the Agreement dated , 20 , on or before , 20 , and you are to complete the WORK within consecutive calendar days thereafter. The date of completion of all WORK is therefore , 20 .

Ascension Parish Government Owner

__________________________________

By Tommy Martinez

Title Parish President

ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE Receipt of the above NOTICE TO PROCEED is hereby acknowledged by , this the , 20 By Title

SCHEDULE OF VALUES

Contractor to use the following format. Total Contract cost is to be itemized in each sub-section listed (as applicable)

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Quantity Cost

01000 General Requirements ________________ ________________

TOTAL ________________DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02100 Site Preparation ________________ ________________

02211 Rough Grading ________________ ________________

02212 Finish Grading ________________ ________________

02222 Backfilling for Utilities and Pavement ________________ ________________

02250 Minor Demolition ________________ ________________

02361 Termite Control ________________ ________________

02600 Concrete Paving ________________ ________________

02622 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping ________________ ________________

02710 Storm Drainage System Appurtenances ________________ ________________

TOTAL ________________DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

03200 Concrete Reinforcement ________________ ________________

03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete ________________ ________________

TOTAL ________________DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

04100 Masonry Mortar and Grout ________________ ________________

04202 Brick Veneer ________________ ________________

TOTAL ________________

DIVISION 05 – METALS

05500 Metal Fabrications ________________ ________________

TOTAL ________________

DIVISION 06 – WOODS, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES

06100 Rough Carpentry ________________ ________________

06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry ________________ ________________

06200 Finish Carpentry ________________ ________________

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

07120 Fluid Applied Waterproofing ________________ ________________

07160 Damp-Proofing ________________ ________________

07190 Vapor Retarder ________________ ________________

07210 Building Insulation ________________ ________________

07250 Weather Barriers ________________ ________________

07311 Asphalt Shingle Roofing System ________________ ________________

07631 Flashing and Sheet Metal Gutters ________________ ________________

07840 Firestopping ________________ ________________

07900 Joint Sealants ________________ ________________

TOTAL ________________

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

08111 Standard Steel Doors and Frames ________________ ________________

08211 Flush Wood Doors ________________ ________________

08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts ________________ ________________

08710 Door Hardware ________________ ________________

08800 Glazing ________________ ________________

TOTAL ________________

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

09260 Gypsum Board Systems ________________ ________________

09300 Wall Tile ________________ ________________

09511 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings ________________ ________________

09650 Resilient Flooring ________________ ________________

09680 Carpet ________________ ________________

09900 Painting ________________ ________________

TOTAL ________________

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10155 Toilet Compartments ________________ ________________

10426 Signage and Graphics ________________ ________________

10520 Fire Protection Specialties ________________ ________________

10800 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories ________________ ________________

TOTAL ________________

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS NOT USED DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 15 –MECHANICAL

General Provisions ________________ ________________

Motors ________________ ________________

Piping Expansion Compensation ________________ ________________

Motor Starters ________________ ________________

Supports and Sleeves ________________ ________________

Piping and Equipment Identification ________________ ________________

Equipment Isolation ________________ ________________

Piping Insulation ________________ ________________

Plumbing Piping ________________ ________________

Plumbing Specialties ________________ ________________

Pumps and Accessories for Plumbing Systems ________________ ________________

Natural Gas Piping ________________ ________________

Electric Hot Water Heater ________________ ________________

Plumbing Fixtures ________________ ________________

Testing and Balancing ________________ ________________

Ductwork Insulation ________________ ________________

Temperature Controls ________________ ________________

Temperature Controls Sequence of Operators ________________ ________________

Refrigerant Piping ________________ ________________

Ductwork ________________ ________________

Ductwork Accessories ________________ ________________

Power Ventilators ________________ ________________

Air Outlets and Inlets ________________ ________________

DX Split System Air Conditioners ________________ ________________

TOTAL ________________

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

Basic Electrical Requirements ________________ ________________

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ________________ ________________

Service and Distribution ________________ ________________

Power Circuits ________________ ________________

Lighting ________________ ________________

Voice Data Systems ________________ ________________

Fire Alarm System ________________ ________________

TOTAL ________________

Ascension Counseling Center Additions and Renovations Recommendation of Acceptance ENG-12-061 Page 1

RECOMMENDATION OF ACCEPTANCE

TO: PARISH OF ASCENSION FROM: FUSION ARCHITECTURE, APC

P.O. Box 1659 3488 Brentwood Drive, Suite 101 Gonzales, LA 70707 Baton Rouge, LA 70809

DATE:

PROJECT NAME & NUMBER:

CONTRACTOR: ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT: $

FINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT: $

FINAL BUILDING AREA (SQ. FEET): I certify that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, this project is substantially complete in accordance with the Plans and Specifications to the point where it can be used for the purpose which was intended. It is recommended that it be accepted. DATE OF ACCEPTANCE:

CONTRACT DATE OF COMPLETION:

NUMBER OF DAYS (OVERRUN) (UNDERRUN) (As of Acceptance Date)

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES PER DAY STIPULATED IN CONTRACT $

VALUE OF PUNCH LIST $ (Attach punch list)

Was part of project occupied prior to Acceptance?

PORTION OCCUPIED: (Attach Partial Occupancy Forms)

ROOF GUAR-MANUF: START DATE: END DATE:

ROOFER: START DATE: END DATE:

Signed: ARCHITECT

Signed:

OWNER

Ascension Counseling Center Additions and Renovations Partial Occupancy ENG-12-061 Page 1

PARTIAL OCCUPANCY

PROJECT NAME: PROJECT NUMBER: CMFS NUMBER: CONTRACTOR: USER AGENCY: The below described portion of subject project is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, complete to a point where the User desires to use in according with the Contract Documents. DATE OCCUPIED:

WARRANTY items covered by Occupancy: Architect Date Contractor Date Owner Date Punch List: Attached

None

2013 SC 1

 

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions modify, change, delete from or add to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 2007 Edition. Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect. Articles, Paragraphs, Subparagraphs or Clauses modified or deleted have the same numerical designation as those occurring in the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 1

GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS

1.1.1. THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS In Subparagraph 1.1.1 delete the third sentence, and add the following sentence: The Contract Documents shall include the Bid Documents as listed in the Instructions to Bidders and any modifications made thereto by addenda.

1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE [REFER TO R.S. 38:2317]

1.5.1 Delete the first sentence of the paragraph. 1.5.1 In the third sentence: delete the remainder after the word “publication”.

ARTICLE 2

OWNER 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 Delete this paragraph. 2.2.2 In the first sentence, delete: all before “…the Owner shall secure…”

ARTICLE 3

CONTRACTOR

3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS

2013 SC 2

 

3.4.2 Delete this paragraph. 3.4.3 Delete this paragraph and substitute with the following: Contractor and its employees, officers, agents, representatives, and Subcontractors shall conduct themselves in an appropriate and professional manner, in accordance with the Owner’s requirements, at all times while working on the Project. Any such individual who behaves in an inappropriate manner or who engages in the use of inappropriate language or conduct while on Owner’s property, as determined by the Owner, shall be removed from the Project at the Owner’s request. Such individual shall not be permitted to return without the written permission of the Owner. The Owner shall not be responsible or liable to Contractor or any Subcontractor for any additional costs, expenses, losses, claims or damages incurred by Contractor or its Subcontractor as a result of the removal of an individual from the Owner’s property pursuant to this paragraph. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES, AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS (R.S. 40:1724[A]) 3.7.1 Delete Subparagraph 3.7.1 3.7.2 Delete Subparagraph 3.7.5 and substitute the following: 3.7.5 If, during the course of the Work, the Contractor discovers human remains, unmarked burial or archaeological sites, burial artifacts, or wetlands, which are not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall follow all procedures mandated by State and Federal law, including but not limited to L.R.S. 8:671 et seq., R.S. 49:213.1 et seq., and Sections 401 & 404 of the Federal Clean Water Act. Request for adjustment of the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features shall be submitted in writing to the Owner pursuant to the Contract Documents. 3.8 ALLOWANCES Delete Subparagraph 3.8.1, 3.8.2, and 3.8.3 in their entirety and add the following new Subparagraph 3.8.1: 3.8.1 Allowances shall not be made on any of the Work. 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 Add the following to the end of the paragraph: Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. 3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 Add the following: For projects with a contract sum greater than $1,000,000.00, the Contractor shall include with the schedule, for the Owner’s and Architect’s information, a network analysis to identify those tasks which are on the critical path, i.e. where any delay in the completion of these tasks will lengthen the project timescale, unless action

2013 SC 3

 

is taken. A revised schedule shall be submitted with each Application and Certificate for Payment. No payment will be made until this schedule is received. 3.10.3 Delete the word “…general…” Add the following: If the Work is not on schedule, as

determined by the Architect, and the Contractor fails to take action to bring the Work on schedule, then the Contractor shall be deemed in default under this Contract and the progress of the Work shall be deemed unsatisfactory. Such default may be considered grounds for termination by the Owner for cause in accordance with 14.2.

3.10.4 Add the following: Submittal by the contractor of a schedule or other documentation showing a completion date for his Work prior to the completion date stated in the contract shall not impose any obligation or responsibility on the Owner or Architect for the earlier completion date. 3.10.5 Add the following: In the event the Owner employs a commissioning consultant, the Contractor shall cooperate fully in the commissioning process and shall require all subcontractors and others under his control to cooperate. The purpose of such services shall be to ensure that all systems perform correctly and interactively according to the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE Add the following: This requirement is of the essence of the contract. The Architect shall determine the value of these documents and this amount shall not be approved for payment to the Contractor until all of the listed documents are delivered to the Architect in good order, completely marked with field changes and otherwise complete in all aspects.

ARTICLE 4

ARCHITECT 4.1 GENERAL Delete Subparagraph 4.1.1 and substitute the following: 4.1.1 The term Architect, when used in the Contract Documents, shall mean the prime Designer (Architect, Engineer or Landscape Architect), or his authorized representative, lawfully licensed to practice architecture, engineering or landscape architecture in the State of Louisiana, identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. 4.1.3 Delete the words: “as to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and” 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 In the first sentence, delete the phrase: “the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment” and replace with the phrase “final payment is due, and with the Owner’s concurrence, from time to time during the one year period for correction of Work described in Section 12.2.”

2013 SC 4

 

4.2.2 In the first sentence, after the phrase: “become generally familiar with”; insert the following: “and to keep the Owner informed about.” In the first sentence, after the phrase “portion of the Work completed”, insert the following: “to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work,” 4.2.10 Add the following sentence to the end of Subsection 4.2.10: There will be no restriction on the Owner having a Representative. 4.2.11 Add the following sentence to the end of Subsection 4.2.11: If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretation required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Section 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretation until 15 days after written request is made for them. 4.2.14 Insert the following sentence between the second and third sentences of Subsection 4.2.14: If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretation required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Section 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretation until 15 days after written request is made for them.

ARTICLE 5

SUBCONTRACTORS

5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK Delete Subparagraph 5.2.1, and substitute the following: 5.2.1 Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall furnish at the Pre-Construction Conference, to the Owner and the Architect, in writing, the names of the persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each of the principal portions of the Work. No Contractor payments shall be made until this information is received. Delete Subparagraph 5.2.2 and substitute the following: 5.2.2 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for selection and performance of all subcontractors. The Contractor shall not be entitled to claims for additional time and/or an increase in the contract sum due to a problem with performance or non- performance of a subcontractor.

2013 SC 5

 

Delete Subparagraph 5.2.3 and 5.2.4 and add the following: 5.2.3 The contractor shall notify the Owner when a subcontractor is to be changed and substituted with another subcontractor. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS Delete Subparagraphs 5.4.1, 5.4.2 and 5.4.3

ARTICLE 7

CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 GENERAL Add the following paragraph: 7.1.4 As part of the pre-construction conference submittals, the contractor is to submit the following prior to the commencement of Work: Fixed job site overhead cost itemized with documentation to support daily rates. Bond Premium Rate with supporting information from the General Contractor’s carrier. Labor Burden by trade for both Subcontractors and General Contractor. Internal Rate Charges for all significant company owned equipment. Failure to submit this information as part of the pre-construction submittals shall prohibit the Contractor from claiming these items as costs on any change order issued on the project. 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS Delete Subparagraph clause 7.2.1, and substitute the following paragraphs: 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and the Architect, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement therewith, including the adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. Any reservation of rights, stipulation, or other modification made on the change order by the contractor will have no effect. 7.2.2 “Cost of the Work” for the purpose of Change Orders shall be costs required to be incurred in performance of the Work and paid by the Contractor and Subcontractors which shall consist of:

2013 SC 6

 

7.2.2.1 Wages paid direct labor personnel, delineating a labor burden markup for applicable payroll taxes, worker’s compensation insurance, unemployment compensation, and social security taxes. 7.2.2.2 Cost of all materials and supplies, including the identification of each item and its cost including taxes. 7.2.2.3 Identify each necessary piece of machinery and equipment and its individual cost including taxes. 7.2.2.4 Increases in insurance premiums for those forms of insurance required by Article

11 of these Supplementary Conditions and only for those forms. 7.2.2.5 Bond costs. Credit will not be required for Overhead and Profit. 7.2.3 Overhead and Profit - The Contractor and Subcontractor shall be due job-site and home office fixed overhead and profits on the Cost of the Work, but shall not exceed a total of 25% of the direct cost of any portion of Work: The credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be the sum of those items above, except credit will not be required for Overhead and Profit. Where a change results in both credits to the Owner and extras to the Contractor for related items, overhead and profit will only be computed on the net extra cost to the Contractor. 7.2.4 The cost to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be the sum of: Cost of the Work (as defined at 7.2.2) and Overhead and Profit (as defined at 7.2.4), and shall be computed as follows: 7.2.4.1 When all of the Work is General Contract Work; 15% markup on the Cost of the Work. 7.2.4.2 When the Work is all Subcontract Work; 15% markup on the Cost of the Work for Subcontractor’s Overhead and Profit, plus 10% markup on the Cost of the Work, not including the Subcontractor’s Overhead and Profit markup, for General Contractor’s Overhead and Profit. 7.2.4.3 When the Work is a combination of General Contract Work and Subcontract Work; that portion of the direct cost that is General Contract Work shall be computed per 7.2.4.1 and that portion of the direct cost that is Subcontract Work shall be computed per 7.2.4.2. Premiums for the General Contractor’s bond may be included, but after the markup is added to the Cost of the Work. 7.2.4.4 Subcontract cost shall consist of the items in 7.2.2 above plus Overhead and Profit as defined in 7.2.4.

2013 SC 7

 

7.2.5 Before a Change Order is prepared, the Contractor shall provide and deliver to the Architect the following information concerning the Cost of the Work, not subject to waiver, within a reasonable time after being notified to prepare said Change Order: A detailed itemized list of labor, material and equipment costs for the General Contractor’s Work including quantities and unit costs for each item of labor, material and equipment. An itemized list of labor, material and equipment costs for each Subcontractor’s and/or Sub-Subcontractor’s Work including quantities and unit costs for each item of labor, material and equipment. 7.2.6 After a Change Order has been approved, no future requests for extensions of time or additional cost shall be considered for that Change Order. 7.2.7 The Contractor will be due extended fixed job-site overhead for time delays only when complete stoppage of Work occurs causing a contract completion extension, and the Contractor is unable to mitigate financial damages through replacement Work. The stoppage must be due to acts or omissions solely attributable to the Owner. In all cases the Contractor is to notify the Architect in writing as required by Article 15.1.2. Reasonable proof may be required by the architect that alternate Work could not be performed. Reasonable proof may be required by the Architect that the stoppage affected the Completion Date. 7.2.8 “Cost of the Work” whether General Contract cost or Subcontract cost shall not apply to the following: Salaries or other compensation of the Contractor’s personnel at the Contractor’s principal office and branch offices. Any part of the Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on the Contractor’s capital employed for the Work. Overhead and general expenses of any kind or the cost of any item not specifically and expressly included above in Cost of the Work. Cost of supervision not specifically required by the Change Order. 7.2.9 When applicable as provided by the Contract, the cost to Owner for Change Orders shall be determined by quantities and unit prices. The quantity of any item shall be as submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect. Unit prices shall cover cost of Material, Labor, Equipment, Overhead and Profit. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.3 In the first sentence after following methods add: “, but not to exceed a specified amount.”

2013 SC 8

 

7.3.7 Delete the following from .1 of the list: “fringe benefits required by agreement or custom,” Delete the following from .4 of the list: “permit fees,” Delete the following from .5 of the list: “and field office personnel” 7.3.9 Delete Subparagraph 7.3.9 and substitute the following: Pending final determination of the total costs of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties’ agreement with part or all of such costs.

ARTICLE 8

TIME

8.1 DEFINITIONS Add the following: 8.1.5 The Contract Time shall not be changed by the submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date unless specifically authorized by change order. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Add to Subparagraph 8.2.1 the following: Completion of the Work must be within the Time for Completion stated in the Agreement, subject to such extensions as may be granted under Section 8.3. The Contractor agrees to commence Work not later than fourteen (14) days after the transmittal date of Written Notice to Proceed from the Owner and to substantially complete the project within the time stated in the Contract. The Owner will suffer financial loss if the project is not substantially complete in the time set forth in the Contract Documents. The Contractor and the Contractor’s Surety shall be liable for and shall pay to the Owner the sum stated in the Contract Documents as fixed, agreed and liquidated damages for each consecutive calendar day (Saturdays, Sundays and holidays included) of delay until the Work is substantially complete. The Owner shall be entitled to the sum stated in the Contract Documents. Such Liquidated Damages shall be withheld by the Owner from the amounts due the Contractor for progress payments. Delete Subparagraph 8.2.2 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 In the first sentence after the words Owner pending delete the words: “mediation and arbitration” and add the word: “litigation” and delete the last word: “determine” and add the following: “recommend, subject to Owner’s approval of Change Order. If the claim

2013 SC 9

 

is not made within the limits of Article 15, all right for future claims for that month are waived.”

ARTICLE 9

PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Delete Subparagraph 9.2 and substitute the following: 9.2 At the Pre-Construction Conference, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner and the Architect a Schedule of Values prepared as follows: 9.2.1 The attached Schedule of Values Format shall be used. If applicable, the cost of Work for each section listed under each division, shall be given. The cost for each section shall include Labor, Materials, Overhead and Profit. 9.2.2 The Total of all items shall equal the Total Contract Sum. This schedule, when approved by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for the Contractor’s Applications for Payment and it may be used for determining the cost of the Work in deductive change orders, when a specific item of Work listed on the Schedule of Values is to be removed. Once the Schedule of Values is submitted at the Pre-Construction Conference, the schedule may not be modified without approval from the Owner and Architect. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT Delete Subparagraph 9.3.1 and clause 9.3.1.1 and 9.3.1.2 and substitute the following: 9.3.1 Monthly, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an Application & Certificate for Payment on the AIA Document G702-1992, accompanied by AIA Document G703-1992, and supported by any additional data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or the Architect may require. Application for Payment shall be submitted on or about the first of each month for the value of labor and materials incorporated into the Work and of materials, suitably stored, at the site as of the twenty-fifth day of the preceding month, less normal retainage as follows, per R.S. 38:2248: 9.3.1.1 Projects with Contract price up to $500,000.00 – 10% of the Contract price. 9.3.1.2 Projects with Contract price of $500,000.00, or more – 5% of the Contract price. 9.3.1.3 No payment will be made until the revised schedule required by Section 3.10.1 is received. The normal retainage shall not be due the Contractor until after substantial completion and expiration of the forty-five day lien period and submission to the Architect of a clear lien certificate, consent of surety and invoice for retainage.

2013 SC 10

 

Delete Subparagraph 9.3.2 and substitute the following: 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. Payments for materials or equipment stored on the site shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, including applicable insurance. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION Subparagraph 9.5.1.7: Delete the word “repeated”. Delete Subparagraph 9.5.3 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS Delete Subparagraph 9.6.1 and substitute the following: 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment within twenty days except for projects funded fully or in part by a Federal reimbursement program. For such projects the Owner will make payment in a timely manner consistent with reimbursement. 9.6.2 Delete the phrase: “no later than seven days” from the first sentence. After the end of the second sentence, add the following: R.S. 9:2784 (A) and (C) require a Contractor or Subcontractor to make payment due to each Subcontractor and supplier within fourteen (14) consecutive days of the receipt of payment from the Owner. If not paid, a penalty in the amount of ½ of 1% per day is due, up to a maximum of 15% from the expiration date until paid. The contractor or subcontractor, whichever is applicable, is solely responsible for payment of a penalty. 9.6.4 Delete the first two sentences of Subparagraph 9.6.4 and add the following to the end of the Subparagraph: Pursuant to La. R.S. 38:2242, when the Owner receives any claim of nonpayment arising out of the Contract, the Owner shall deduct 125% of such claim from the Contract Sum. The Contractor, or any interested party, may deposit security, in accordance with La. R.S. 38:2242.2, guaranteeing payment of the claim with the recorder of mortgages of the parish where the Work has been done. When the Owner receives original proof of such guarantee from the recorder of mortgages, the claim deduction will be added back to the Contract Sum. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT Delete Subparagraph 9.7

2013 SC 11

 

9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: Delete this section and substitute the following: 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. The Architect shall determine if the project is substantially complete in accordance with this Subparagraph. 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work is Substantially Complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work is substantially complete. A prerequisite to the Work being considered as substantially complete is the Owner’s receipt of the executed Roofing Contractor’s and Roofing Manufacturer’s guarantees, where roofing Work is part of the Contract. Prior to inspection by the Architect, the Contractor shall notify the Architect that the project is ready for inspection by the State Fire Marshal’s office. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before the Work can be considered as Substantially Complete, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. 9.8.4 When the Architect determines that the project is Substantially Complete, he shall prepare a punch list of exceptions and the dollar value related thereto. The monetary value assigned to this list will be the sum of the cost estimate for each particular item of Work the Architect develops based on the mobilization, labor, material and equipment costs of correcting the item and shall be retained from the monies owed the contractor, above and beyond the standard lien retainage. The cost of these items shall be prepared in the same format as the schedule of values. At the end of the 45 day lien period payment shall be approved for all punch list items completed up to that time. After that payment, none of the remaining funds shall be due the contractor until all punch list items are completed and are accepted by the Architect. If the dollar value of the punch list exceeds the amount of funds, less the retainage amount, in the remaining balance of the Contract, then the Project shall not be considered as substantially complete. If funds remaining are less than that required to complete the Work, the Contractor shall pay the difference. 9.8.5 When the preparation of the punch list is complete the Architect shall prepare a Recommendation of Acceptance incorporating the punch list and submit it to the Owner. Upon approval of the Recommendation of Acceptance, the Owner may issue a Notice of Acceptance of Building Contract which shall establish the Date of Substantial Completion. The Contractor will record the Notice of Acceptance with the Clerk of Court in the Parish in which the Work has been performed. If the Notice of Acceptance has not been recorded seven (7) days after issuance, the Owner may record the

2013 SC 12

 

Acceptance at the Contractor’s expense. All additive change orders must be processed before issuance of the Recommendation of Acceptance. The Owner will not be responsible for payment for any Work associated with change orders that is not incorporated into the contract at the time of the Recommendation of Acceptance. 9.8.6 Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Acceptance of the Work unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner and Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner and Contractor, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work not covered by the punch list and insurance shall become the Owner’s responsibility on the Date of Substantial Completion. 9.8.7 If all punch list items have not been completed by the end of the forty-five (45) day lien period, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may hold the Contractor in default. If the Owner finds the Contractor is in default, the Surety shall be notified. If within forty-five (45) days after notification, the Surety has not completed the punch list, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may, at his option, contract to have the balance of the Work completed and pay for such Work with the unpaid funds remaining in the Contract sum. Finding the Contractor in default shall constitute a reason for disqualification of the Contractor from bidding on future state contracts. If the surety fails to complete the punch list within the stipulated time period, the Owner may not accept bonds submitted, in the future, by the surety. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 Delete paragraph and substitute the following: Partial Occupancy is that stage in the progress of the Work when a designated portion of the Work is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the designated portion of the Work for its intended use. The Owner may occupy or use any substantially completed portion of the Work so designated by separate agreement with the Contractor and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such occupancy or use may commence provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers the designated portion substantially complete the Contract shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonable withheld. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 After the first sentence, add the following: If the Architect does not find the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents, the Architect shall make one additional inspection; if the Work is still not acceptable, the Architect, and each of the Architect’s principal consultants, shall be paid $175.00/hour for their time at the project site, for each additional inspection, to be withheld from the

2013 SC 13

 

unpaid funds remaining in the Contract sum. The payment shall be made by the Owner and deducted from the construction contract funds. 9.10.4 Replace with the following: The making of final payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner for the following: 9.10.4.1 Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; 9.10.4.2 Failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents irrespective of when such failure is discovered; or 9.10.4.3 Terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 10

PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.2 In the first sentence, between the words: “bearing on and safety”, add the words: “the health and,” 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 10.3.1 In the first sentence after (PCB) add: “or lead” 10.3.2 After the first sentence, delete all remaining sentences. Add at the end: “The Contract time shall be extended appropriately.” 10.4 EMERGENCIES Delete Subparagraph 10.4 and substitute the following: 10.4 In an emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and Architect immediately of the emergency, simultaneously acting at his discretion to prevent damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency Work shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7.

ARTICLE 11

INSURANCE AND BONDS

Delete all of Paragraphs 11.1, 11.2 and 11.3 and substitute the following:

2013 SC 14

 

INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR

NEW CONSTRUCTION, ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS 11.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain without interruption for the duration of the contract insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the Work hereunder by the Contractor, its agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors. The duration of the contract shall be from the inception of the contract until the date of final payment. 11.2 MINIMUM SCOPE AND LIMITS OF INSURANCE 11.2.1 Worker’s Compensation Worker’s Compensation insurance shall be in compliance with the Worker’s Compensation law of the State of Louisiana. Employers Liability is included with a minimum limit of $500,000 per accident/per disease/per employee. If Work is to be performed over water and involves maritime exposure, applicable LHWCA, Jones Act or other maritime law coverage shall be included and the Employers Liability limit increased to a minimum of $1,000,000. A.M. Best’s insurance company rating requirement may be waived for Worker’s compensation coverage only. 11.2.2 Commercial General Liability Commercial General Liability insurance, including Personal and Advertising Injury Liability and Products and Completed Operations Liability, shall have a minimum limit per occurrence based on the project value. The Insurance Services Office (ISO) Commercial General Liability occurrence coverage form CG 00 01 (current form approved for use in Louisiana), or equivalent, is to be used in the policy. Claims-made form is unacceptable. The aggregate loss limit must apply to each project. ISO form CG 25 03 (current form approved for use in Louisiana), or equivalent, shall also be submitted. COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (CSL) PER OCCURRENCE Projects over Type of Projects $1,000,000 up to Projects over Construction up to $1,000,000 _$10,000,000__ $10,000,000 New Buildings: Each Occurrence Minimum Limit $1,000,000 $2,000,000 $4,000,000 Per Project Aggregate $2,000,000 $4,000,000 $8,000,000

Each Occurrence Minimum Limit $1,000,000** $2,000,000** $4,000,000**

2013 SC 15

 

Per Project Aggregate 2 times per 2 times per 2 times per occur limit** occur limit** occur limit** **While the minimum Combined Single Limit of $500,000 is required for any renovation, the limit is calculated by taking 10% of the building value and rounding it to the nearest $1,000,000 to get the insurance limit. Example: Renovation on a $33,000,000 building would have a calculated $3,000,000 combined single limit of coverage (33,000,000 times .10 = 3,300,000 and then rounding down to $3,000,000). If the calculated limit is less than the minimum limit listed in the above chart, then the amount needed is the minimum listed in the chart. Maximum per occurrence limit required is $10,000,000 regardless of building value. The per project aggregate limit is then calculated as twice the per occurrence limit. 11.2.3 Automobile Liability Automobile Liability Insurance shall have a minimum combined single limit per occurrence of $500,000. ISO form number CA 00 01 (current form approved for use in Louisiana), or equivalent, is to be used in the policy. This insurance shall include third- party bodily injury and property damage liability for owned, hired and non-owned automobiles. 11.2.4 Excess Umbrella Excess Umbrella Insurance may be used to meet the minimum requirements for General Liability and Automobile Liability only. 11.2.5 Builder’s Risk Builder’s Risk Insurance shall be in an amount equal to the greater of the fully- completed project value or the amount of the construction contract including any amendments and shall be upon the entire Work included in the contract. The policy shall provide coverage equivalent to the ISO form number CP 10 20, Broad Form Causes of Loss (extended, if necessary, to include the perils of wind, earthquake, collapse, vandalism/malicious mischief, and theft, including theft of materials whether or not attached to any structure). The policy must include architects’ and engineers’ fees necessary to provide plans, specifications and supervision of Work for the repair and/or replacement of property damage caused by a covered peril, not to exceed 10% of the cost of the repair and/or replacement. 11.2.6 Pollution Liability (required when asbestos or other hazardous material abatement is included in the contract) Pollution Liability insurance, including gradual release as well as sudden and accidental, shall have a minimum limit of not less than $1,000,000 per claim. A claims-made form will be acceptable. A policy period inception date of no later than the first day of anticipated Work under this contract and an expiration date of no earlier than 30 days after anticipated completion of all Work under the contract shall be provided. There shall be an extended reporting period of at least 24 months, with full reinstatement of

2013 SC 16

 

limits, from the expiration date of the policy. The policy shall not be cancelled for any reason, except non-payment of premium. 11.2.7 Deductibles and Self-Insured Retentions Any deductibles or self-insured retentions must be declared to and accepted by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for all deductibles and self-insured retentions. 11.3 OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS 11.3.1 The policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions: 11.3.1.1 Worker’s Compensation and Employers Liability Coverage 11.3.1.1.1 The insurer shall agree to waive all rights of subrogation against the Owner, its officers, agents, employees and volunteers for losses arising from Work performed by the Contractor for the Owner. 11.3.1.2 General Liability Coverage 11.3.1.2.1 The Owner, its officers, agents, employees and volunteers are to be added as additional insureds as respects liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of the Contractor; products and completed operations of the Contractor, premises owned, occupied or used by the Contractor. ISO Form CG 20 10 (current form approved for use in Louisiana), or equivalent, is to be used. 11.3.1.2.2 The Contractor’s insurance shall be primary as respects the Owner, its officers, agents, employees and volunteers. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees or volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the Owner shall be excess and non-contributory of the Contractor’s insurance. 11.3.1.2.3 The Contractor’s insurance shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the policy limits. 11.3.1.3 Builder’s Risk The policy must include an endorsement providing the following:

In the event of a disagreement regarding a loss covered by this policy which may also be covered by Parish of Ascension, Contractor and its

2013 SC 17

 

insurer agree to follow the following procedure to establish coverage and/or the amount of loss:

Any party to a loss may make written demand for an appraisal of the matter in disagreement. Within 20 days of receipt of written demand, the Contractor’s insurer and Parish of Ascension or its commercial insurance company shall each select a competent and impartial appraiser and notify the other of the appraiser selected. The two appraisers will select a competent and impartial umpire. The appraisers will then identify the policy or policies under which the loss is insured and, if necessary, state separately the value of the property and the amount of the loss that must be borne by each policy. If the two appraisers fail to agree, they shall submit their differences to the umpire. A written decision by any two shall determine the policy or policies and the amount of the loss. Each insurance company agrees that the decision of the appraisers and the umpire if involved will be binding and final and that neither party will resort to litigation. Each of the two parties shall pay its chosen appraiser and bear the cost of the umpire equally.

11.3.1.4 All Coverages 11.3.1.4.1 Coverage shall not be canceled, suspended, or voided by either party (the Contractor or the insurer) or reduced in coverage or in limits except after 30 days written notice has been given to the Owner. Ten-day written notice of cancellation is acceptable for non-payment of premium. Notifications shall comply with the standard cancellation provisions in the Contractor’s policy. 11.3.1.4.2 Neither the acceptance of the completed Work nor the payment thereof shall release the Contractor from the obligations of the insurance requirements or indemnification agreement. 11.3.1.4.3 The insurance companies issuing the policies shall have no recourse against the Owner for payment of premiums or for assessments under any form of the policies. 11.3.1.4.4 Any failure of the Contractor to comply with reporting provisions of the policy shall not affect coverage provided to the Owner, its officers, agents, employees and volunteers. 11.3.2 ACCEPTABILITY OF INSURERS All required insurance shall be provided by a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located. Insurance shall be placed with insurers with an A.M. Best’s rating of A-:VI or higher. This rating requirement may be waived for Worker’s compensation coverage only.

2013 SC 18

 

If at any time an insurer issuing any such policy does not meet the minimum A.M. Best rating, the Contractor shall obtain a policy with an insurer that meets the A.M. Best rating and shall submit another certificate of insurance as required in the contract. 11.3.3 VERIFICATION OF COVERAGE Contractor shall furnish the Owner with Certificates of Insurance reflecting proof of required coverage. The Certificates for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The Certificates are to be received and approved by the Owner before Work commences and upon any contract renewal thereafter. The Certificate Holder must be listed as follows: Name of Owner: Parish of Ascension Owner Address: 208 Railroad Ave. City, State, Zip: Gonzales, LA 70810 Attn: Project # 13014 In addition to the Certificates, Contractor shall submit the declarations page and the cancellation provision endorsement for each insurance policy. The Owner reserves the right to request complete certified copies of all required insurance policies at any time. Upon failure of the Contractor to furnish, deliver and maintain such insurance as above provided, this contract, at the election of the Owner, may be suspended, discontinued or terminated. Failure of the Contractor to purchase and/or maintain any required insurance shall not relieve the Contractor from any liability or indemnification under the contract. If the Contractor does not meet the insurance requirements at policy renewal, at the option of the Owner, payment to the Contractor may be withheld until the requirements have been met, OR the Owner may pay the renewal premium and withhold such payment from any monies due the Contractor, OR the contract may be suspended or terminated for cause. 11.3.4 SUBCONTRACTORS Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies OR shall be responsible for verifying and maintaining the certificates provided by each subcontractor. Subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein. The Owner reserves the right to request copies of subcontractor’s certificates at any time. If Contractor does not verify subcontractors’ insurance as described above, Owner has the right to withhold payments to the Contractor until the requirements have been met. 11.3.5 WORKER’S COMPENSATION INDEMNITY In the event Contractor is not required to provide or elects not to provide Worker’s compensation coverage, the parties hereby agree the Contractor, its Owners, agents and employees will have no cause of action against, and will not assert a claim against, Parish of Ascension, its departments, agencies, agents and employees as an employer, whether pursuant to the Louisiana Worker’s Compensation Act or otherwise, under any circumstance. The parties also hereby agree that the Parish of Ascension, its departments,

2013 SC 19

 

agencies, agents and employees shall in no circumstance be, or considered as, the employer or statutory employer of Contractor, its Owners, agents and employees. The parties further agree that Contractor is a wholly independent Contractor and is exclusively responsible for its employees, Owners, and agents. Contractor hereby agrees to protect, defend, indemnify and hold the Parish of Ascension, its departments, agencies, agents and employees harmless from any such assertion or claim that may arise from the performance of this contract. 11.3.6 INDEMNIFICATION/HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT

Contractor agrees to protect, defend, indemnify, save, and hold harmless, the Parish of Ascension, all Departments, Agencies, Boards and Commissions, its officers, agents, servants, employees and volunteers, from and against any and all claims, damages, expenses and liability arising out of injury or death to any person or the damage, loss or destruction of any property which may occur, or in any way grow out of, any act or omission of Contractor, its agents, servants and employees, or any and all costs, expenses and/or attorney fees incurred by Contractor as a result of any claims, demands, suits or causes of action, except those claims, demands, suits or causes of action arising out of the negligence of the Parish of Ascension, all Departments, Agencies, Boards, Commissions, its officers, agents, servants, employees and volunteers.

Contractor agrees to investigate, handle, respond to, provide defense for and defend any such claims, demands, suits or causes of action at its sole expense and agrees to bear all other costs and expenses related thereto, even if the claims, demands, suits, or causes of action are groundless, false or fraudulent. 11.4 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND Add the following Subparagraph 11.4.3: 11.4.3 RECORDATION OF CONTRACT AND BOND [38:2241A(2)] The Owner shall record within thirty (30) days the Contract Between Owner and Contractor and Performance and Payment Bond with the Clerk of Court in the Parish in which the Work is to be performed.

ARTICLE 12

UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION At the end of the paragraph, add the following sentences: “If the Contractor fails to correct Work identified as defective within a thirty (30) day period, through no fault of the Designer, the Owner may hold the Contractor in default. If the Owner finds the Contractor in default, the Surety shall be notified. If within thirty (30) days after notification, the Surety has not corrected the nonconforming Work, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may contract to have nonconforming Work corrected and hold the Surety and Contractor responsible for the cost, including architectural fees and other indirect costs. If the Surety fails to correct the Work within

2013 SC 20

 

the stipulated time period and fails to meet its obligation to pay the costs, the Owner may elect not to accept bonds submitted in the future by the Surety. Finding the Contractor in default shall constitute a reason for disqualification of the Contractor from bidding on future state contracts. 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.2.1 At the end of the paragraph delete the last sentence and add the following sentences: If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a thirty (30) day period, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may hold the Contractor in default. If the Owner finds the Contractor is in default, the Surety shall be notified. If within thirty (30) days after notification, the Surety has not corrected the nonconforming Work, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may contract to have the nonconforming Work corrected and hold the Surety responsible for the cost including architects fees and other indirect costs. Corrections by the Owner shall be in accordance with Section 2.4. If the Surety fails to correct the nonconforming Work within the stipulated time period and fails to meet its obligation to pay the costs, the Owner may not accept bonds submitted, in the future, by the Surety. 12.2.2.1 At the end of the paragraph delete the last sentence and add the following sentences: If the Contractor fails to correct Work covered by warranties within a thirty (30) day period, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may hold the Contractor in default. If the Owner finds the Contractor is in default, the Surety shall be notified. If within thirty (30) days after notification, the Surety has not corrected the warranty Work, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may contract to have the warranty Work corrected and hold the Surety responsible for the cost including architects fees and other indirect costs. Corrections by the Owner shall be in accordance with Section 2.4. If the Surety fails to correct the warranty Work within the stipulated time period and fails to meet its obligation to pay the costs, the Owner may not accept bonds submitted, in the future, by the Surety.

ARTICLE 13

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW Delete all after the word “located”. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 In the second sentence, delete “Except as … 13.2.2” Delete paragraph 13.2.2 13.4 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS In Subparagraph 13.5.1, delete the second sentence and substitute the following:

2013 SC 21

 

The Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with the Testing Laboratory provided by the Owner, and the Owner shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. Delete the last sentence of Subparagraph 13.5.1 13.5 INTEREST Delete Paragraph 13.6 13.6 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS Delete Paragraph 13.7 (See L.R.S. 38:2189).

ARTICLE 14

TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR Delete clause 14.1.1.4 In Subparagraph 14.1.3, after the word “profit” add the following: “for Work completed prior to stoppage”. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE Add the following clause: 14.2.1.5 Failure to complete the punch list within the lien period as provided in 9.8.7. 14.2.3 Add the following sentence: Termination by the Owner shall not suspend assessment of liquidated damages against the Surety. 14.2.5 Add the following Subparagraph: If an agreed sum of liquidated damages has been established, termination by the Owner under this Article will not relieve the Contractor and/or surety of his obligations under the liquidated damages provisions and the Contractor and/or surety shall be liable to the Owner for per diem liquidated damages.

ARTICLE 15

CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

2013 SC 22

 

15.1 CLAIMS In the first sentence of Subparagraph 15.1.1, after the word “money”, add the phrase: “extension of time,” 15.1.2 Add the following to the end of the paragraph: A Reservation of Rights and similar stipulations shall not be recognized under this contract as having any effect. A party must make a claim as defined herein within the time limits provided. 15.1.3 In the second sentence of the Subparagraph, delete “the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker” and replace with: “his/her decision”. Delete Paragraph 15.1.5.2 and substitute the following: If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a claim for additional time, the Contractor shall document that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. An increase in the contract time due to weather shall not be cause for an increase in the contract sum. At the end of each month, the Contractor shall make one Claim for any adverse weather days occurring within the month. The Claim must be accompanied by sufficient documentation evidencing the adverse days and the impact on construction. Failure to make such Claim within twenty-one (21) days from the last day of the month shall prohibit any future claims for adverse days for that month. 15.1.5.3 Add the following Subparagraph: The following are considered reasonably anticipated days of adverse weather on a monthly basis: January 11 days July 6 days February 10 days August 5 days March 8 days September 4 days April 7 days October 3 days May 5 days November 5 days June 6 days December 8 days The Contractor shall ask for total adverse weather days. The Contractor’s request shall be considered only for days over the allowable number of days stated above. Note: Contract is on a calendar day basis. 15.2 INITIAL DECISION 15.2.1 In the second sentence, delete the word “will” and replace with: “shall always”. In the second sentence, delete the phrase: “unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement.” In the third sentence, delete the word “mediation” and replace with: “litigation”.

2013 SC 23

 

In the third sentence, delete: “unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been rendered.” 15.2.5 In the middle of the first sentence, delete all after the phrase: “rejecting the Claim”. In the second sentence, delete the phrase: “and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker.” In the third sentence, delete all after: “binding on the parties” and add the following: “except that the Owner may reject the solution or suggest a compromise or both.” 15.2.6 Delete Paragraph. Delete Subparagraph 15.2.6.1 15.3 MEDIATION Delete Article 15.3 15.4 ARBITRATION Delete Article 15.4

DIVISION 01

GENERAL CONDITIONS

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01000 Additions and Renovations General Requirements ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS: Prior to the approval of the Contractor's Initial Pay

Application, the following shall be submitted for approval by the A/E and

a. Progress Schedule.

review by the Owner:

b. Schedule of Values. c. List of ALL Subcontractors, Principal Suppliers & Fabricators, and Specialty

Systems Contractors. d. List of Contractor's staff assignments and principal consultants. e. Schedule of Submittals. f. Copy of Building Permit.

1.2 PROGRESS SCHEDULE: Contractor shall submit his/her proposed Construction

Progress Schedule to the Owner and the A/E at the Pre-Construction Meeting. The Schedule shall clearly identify the following: a. The Substantial Completion of the project within the Contract Time; include

consideration for Weather Days. b. Shall be UPDATED concurrent with each Progress Payment Application.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES: Contractor shall prepare his/her Schedule of Values for each

Work Line Item in accordance with the General Conditions. 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S INITIAL PAYMENT APPLICATION:

a. Cover data submitted on AIA Document G702 (no substitutions) with all required information, signatures, and notarization.

b. Allowed to use legible computer printouts outlining Work Line Items and Schedule of Values and Stored Materials in format similar to AIA Document G702 Continuation Sheets.

c. Must bear A/E approval signature prior to review/approval action by the Owner. d. Owner will not approve for payment until all data listed in item #2 above has

been submitted and approved. e. Payment will be made in accordance with Owner's published schedule pending

timely receipt & approval action. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS PAYMENT APPLICATIONS: a. Shall comply with items #4a, 4b, 4c, and 4e above.

b. Contractor shall concurrently submit UPDATED Progress Schedules and Submittal Schedules.

c. Shall include payment adjustments for FULLY EXECUTED Change Orders. d. Affidavits of major subcontractors for no claims. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S FINAL PAYMENT APPLICATION:

a. Shall comply with items #4a, 4b, 4c, and 4e above. b. Shall be clearly marked "FINAL". c. Payment will be made ONLY after satisfactory completion of all Contract Close-

Out items. d. Payment after submission of clear lien and privilege certificate.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01000 Additions and Renovations General Requirements ENG-12-061 Page 2

1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS & SUBMITTAL DATA:

a. During the progress of the Work, the A/E shall promptly take action upon submittal data & provide the EBRPSS Project Manager ONE copy of each "APPROVED" or "APPROVED AS NOTED" shop drawing, catalog data sheet, brochure, etc. as action is taken & returned to the Contractor for the Owner's information and file.

b. The A/E shall promptly advise the EBRPSS Project Manager of: 1. Any submittal data which is delinquent to the Contractor's published

Submittal Schedule, OR, 2. Has been returned for RESUBMITTAL which could delay progress of

construction. 1.8 PROJECT SIGN:

a. The Contractor will be responsible for a 4’ x 8’ graphic sign with the following information:

1. Project Name 2. Owner 3. Architect 4. Contractor 5. Graphics (provided by Architect)

1.9 RECORD DOCUMENTS:

a. Contractor shall maintain one clean set of Contract Documents at the project site for the sole purpose of identifying by date and/or authority all As-Built conditions and authorized modifications as they occur

b. Contractor shall maintain an orderly file at the project site of all "APPROVED" and "APPROVED AS NOTED" submittals, shop drawings, etc.

during the progress of the Work. Particularly important is the documentation of locations for underground and underslab items.

c. At each site visit, the A/E shall review the Contractor's As-Built Documents to see that they are correct and current; A/E shall advise the Owner accordingly.

d. At completion of the project, the Contractor shall transmit the on-site As-Built Documents to the A/E; the A/E shall transcribe all information to create one set of RECORD DOCUMENTS to be sent to the Owner for file.

1.10 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE ("O&M") MANUALS:

a. Owner requires three complete sets. b. Contractor shall logically organize (using index tabs) into sets of manageable

size, heavy-duty, transparent spine label, three-ring binders clearly identifying the Project Name, EBRPSS Project Number, and general content of each binder.

c. The A/E shall review the O&M manuals for completeness & correctness prior to transmitting to the Owner for file.

1.11 CONTRACTOR CLOSE-OUT MATERIALS:

a. Provide quantities of attic stock maintenance materials as specified in locations designated by the Owner.

b. Mount framed-under-glass valve tag schedules in Mechanical Room.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01000 Additions and Renovations General Requirements ENG-12-061 Page 3

c. Provide required extra sprinkler heads and tools in cabinet in Sprinkler Valve area.

d. Mount framed-under-glass fire annunciator wiring diagram. 1.12 CONTRACTOR CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS:

a. Owner requires three complete sets. b. Contractor shall logically organize similar to O&M manual criteria. c. A/E shall review (and sign where required) prior to transmitting to the Owner for

further action & file. d. Required documents include, but may not be limited to, originals and copies (put

all originals in one notebook; put copies in the other two notebooks) of the following: 1. Final Occupancy Certificate. 2. General Contractor's Warranty. 3. All Subcontractor & Specialty Contractor Warranties. 4. All Manufacturer Warranties. 5. All Extended (longer than 1 year) Warranties. 6. Executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. 7. Executed Consent of Surety. 8. Executed Waivers of Liens. 9. Signed-off Acknowledgements of Instruction. 10. Signed-off Acknowledgement of Receipt of Keys. 11. Statutory Affidavit. 12. Non-Influence Affidavit. 13. Valve Tag Schedule. 14. Acknowledgement of satisfactory completion of Punch List Items 15. No Hazardous Material Certification. 16. Boiler Inspection Certificates from State Inspector. 17. Elevator Inspection Certificate

1.13 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS:

a. Contractor shall include in the Close-Out Documents a Certification Warranty Statement that no hazardous materials (containing asbestos, PCB, etc.) were incorporated into the Work.

b. Contractor is advised that the Owner will perform post-construction verification analyses of the project to confirm the Contractor-certified absence of hazardous materials. If hazardous materials are found to exist, the Contractor shall pay ALL costs for the testing, abatement, and replacement with non-hazardous materials.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01010 Additions and Renovations Summary of Work ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

A. The Work of this Contract consists of the interior medical office building improvements as shown on the Drawings.

B. The Work includes general construction, HVAC, plumbing and electrical work as shown on the Drawings.

C. Extra payment will not

D. Special Requirements:

be authorized for relocation, removal, and/or temporary removal and reinstallation of any existing or newly installed construction (ducts, conduit, piping, wiring, fixtures, equipment, finishes, etc.) necessary to properly complete the Work, which could have been anticipated by careful examination of the site and the Documents. Such work shall be performed, without additional cost to the Owner.

1. Contractor's Use of Premises and Adjacent Facilities: Contractor may use specific areas as approved by the Owner for staging.

2. Contractor shall obey all Owner's safety and security regulations. 3. Contractor may use for access existing service driveways but shall keep them

open for Owner's use. 1.3 OWNER-FURNISHED WORK AND MATERIALS

A. The Owner will furnish to the Contractor for installation the following items: 1. Any equipment and materials as noted on the Drawings.

1.4 USE OF THE PREMISES

A. Contractor Use of the Premises: During the construction period the Contractor shall have unlimited use of the area of construction.

B. Limitations: Limit use of the premises to construction activities in areas indicated. C. Partial Owner Occupancy: In accordance with General Conditions 9.9, the Owner

has the right to occupy completed portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the total Work.

1.5 EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. By executing the Contract, the Contractor represents that he has: 1. Visited the site; 2. Made due allowances for difficulties and contingencies to be encountered; 3. Compared Contract Documents with work in place; 4. Informed himself of existing conditions, and;

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01010 Additions and Renovations Summary of Work ENG-12-061 Page 2

5. Notified the Architect of ambiguities, inconsistencies, and errors discovered in the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and existing conditions.

B. In accordance with General Conditions Article 5.7, each Subcontractor shall similarly represent that he has fulfilled the same responsibilities to the Contractor.

C. Failure to visit the site and perform attendant responsibilities listed above shall not relieve the Contractor or any Subcontractor from their obligations, and no extra payment will be authorized for work related to conditions which can be determined by examination of the site and the Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01027 Additions and Renovations Applications for Payment ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Requirements of this Section amplify and do not modify provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions. This Section specifies requirements governing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. A 10% retainage will be held from each application for payment until a clear lien and privilege certificate is issued as per General and Supplementary Conditions.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. General: Submit a Schedule of Values as required by General and Supplementary Conditions 9.2. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with other administrative schedules and forms, including:

1. Contractor's construction schedule (Section 01300). 2. List of subcontractors (General Conditions 5.2.1). 3. Products list (Section 01300). 4. Schedule of submittals (Section 01300).

B. Submittal Date: Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect no later than 10 working days before the initial Application for Payment.

C. Format and Content: Prepare the Schedule of Values on AIA Document G703, using columns A, B and C. Use the Project Manual Index as a guide to establish the format for the Schedule of Values. 1. Content: Indicate the following for each item listed:

Generic name. Related Specification Section. Dollar value to the nearest whole dollar, adjusted to total equal to the Contract Amount.

2. Cost Breakdown: Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment. Break principal sub-contract amounts down into several line items.

3. Allowances: Incorporate Cash Allowances, if any, into the Schedule of Values. 4. Materials Costs: Where an Application for Payment may include materials or

equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed, provide separate line items for cost of the materials and for installation, to equal the total installed value of that part of the Work.

5. Job Overhead Costs: At the Contractor's option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not directly related to cost of actual work in place may

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01027 Additions and Renovations Applications for Payment ENG-12-061 Page 2

be shown as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense.

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Payment Application Requirements: In accordance with General and Supplementary Conditions 9.3, submit monthly Application for Payment with required supporting data. 1. General: Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with the Schedule

of Values and with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid by the Owner.

2. Special Requirements: The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Times: The date for each progress payment is the last day of each month. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the calendar month preceding the payment month. Submit each Application for Payment not later than the fifth day of the payment month.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G 702 and Continuation Sheets G 703 as the form for Application for Payment, unless other form is required by Owner.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and execution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. Incomplete applications will be returned without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and current Contractor's

Construction Schedule. 2. Include as additional line items amounts of Change Orders and Construction

Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application.

E. Transmittal: 1. Submit 5 executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by

means ensuring receipt within 24 hours; one copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required.

2. Transmit with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recording appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following:

List of subcontractors and fabricators (General Conditions 5.2.1). Schedule of Values (Section 01027). Contractor's Construction Schedule (Section 01300). Submittal Schedule (Section 01300). Copies of building permits, authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the Work (General Conditions 3.7.1). Certificates of insurance and insurance policies (Supplementary Conditions 11.1.3). Performance and payment bonds (if required) (Supplementary Conditions 11.4.1). Certificate of Recordation of Contract.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01027 Additions and Renovations Applications for Payment ENG-12-061 Page 3

G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment; this application shall reflect any Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. 1. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this

application are specified in Section 01700. 2. In the Application for Payment that first follows the date of Substantial

Completion, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

H. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with the final Application for Payment are specified in Section 01700.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01035 Additions and Renovations Modification Procedures ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 01035 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. Requirements of this Section amplify and do not modify provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, will be issued or confirmed by the Architect in writing.

1.3 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Requests: Proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time will be issued by the Architect, with a detailed description of the proposed change and supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications, if necessary. 1. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not

consider them an instruction either to stop work in progress, or to execute the proposed change.

2. Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within five (5) calendar days of receipt of the proposal request, submit to the Architect for the Owner's review an estimate of cost necessary to execute the proposed change. Include an itemized list of work to be performed and labor and material unit costs. Where requested, furnish data to substantiate costs and quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

3. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Requests: When concealed or other unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the

change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time.

2. Include an itemized list of work to be performed and labor and material unit costs. Where requested, furnish data to substantiate costs and quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

C. Proposal Request Form: Submit Change Order Proposals in the form and detail as requested by the Architect.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01035 Additions and Renovations Modification Procedures ENG-12-061 Page 2

A. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and Contractor are not in total

agreement on the terms of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. The Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the change in the Work and designate the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract and permit preparation of a Change Order.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of the Owner and Contractor on AIA Form G701, as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01040 Additions and Renovations Coordination ENG-12-061 Page 1 SECTION 01040 COORDINATION

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. 1. Schedule construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best

results. 2. Coordinate installation of components to assure maximum accessibility for

installation, maintenance, service and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later

installation. 4. Coordinate and schedule materials deliveries to assure continuity of operations,

without delay and interruptions. 5. Verify that equipment items are compatible with available mechanical and

electrical systems. B. Communications:

1. Where necessary, distribute memoranda outlining special procedures required for coordination.

2. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate administrative activities with construction to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Project Close-out activities.

D. Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit Coordination Drawings for installation of products and materials. 1. Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals".

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01040 Additions and Renovations Coordination ENG-12-061 Page 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint width in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where necessary to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

B. Clean and maintain completed construction through the remainder of the construction period.

C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to excessive loading, temperature and humidity extremes, staining, contact between incompatible materials, and similar harmful, damaging and other deleterious exposure during the construction period.

D. When working in the occupied areas of the building, the Contractor shall keep the areas free from all dust and debris (no exceptions). If any occupied area requires janitorial services at the beginning of any business day, the building’s janitorial service will be called to expedite the clean-up, and the Contractor will be back-charged. In such case, an appropriate change order will be issued deducting the cost of the janitorial services from the Contractor's contract amount.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01045 Cutting and Patching General Requirements ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. General: This Section specifies requirements for cutting and patching necessary to (1) make connecting portions fit properly, (2) prepare in-place construction to receive new work, (3) restore damaged and defective in-place construction, and (4) provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of mechanical and electrical work.

B. Related Requirements: Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

C. Architect's Approval: Architect's approval is required prior to cutting and patching (1) which affects structural elements, (2) which arises due to previously unknown conditions, and (3) which affects visual effect and performance qualities of the completed construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Where Architect's approval for cutting and patching is required, submit a proposal describing procedures in advance of the time cutting and patching will be performed and request approval to proceed.

B. Compliance: Approval by the Architect to attempt cutting and patching does not waive the Architect's right to later require complete removal and replacement of Work which is not in compliance with Contract requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch components in a manner that would result in reduced performance, increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that results in unacceptable visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace work cut and patched in an unacceptable manner.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01045 Cutting and Patching General Requirements ENG-12-061 Page 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Match adjacent materials. If identical materials are not available, use materials that match adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible and whose installed performance will equal or exceed that of existing materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Installer: If possible employ the original fabricator or installer to perform cutting and patching. Otherwise, employ an equally recognized and experienced entity.

B. Inspection: Before cutting, examine surfaces and conditions. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent

damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for construction that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Coordination: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas and interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D: Utility Services: Provide for continuity of in-use mechanical and electrical systems by-passing before cutting.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction using methods to avoid damaging elements to be retained and adjoining construction. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with the original installer's recommendations.

C. Patching: Patch with durable inconspicuous seams. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to verify suitability of the

installation. 2. Restore finish of patched areas and extend into retained adjoining construction

in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access.

Restore damaged materials to original condition.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01091 Additions and Renovations Reference Standards ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the General and Supplementary Conditions.

B. Indicated: Refers to graphic representations, notes and schedules on the Drawings and other Sections, Paragraphs and Schedules in Specifications. Where terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are used, it is to help locate the reference.

C. Regulations: Laws, statutes, ordinances and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Furnish: Supply and deliver to the project site ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

E. Install: Perform operations at project site such as unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations necessary to incorporate products.

F. Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. G. Installer: An "Installer" is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor, as

an employee, subcontractor or sub-subcontractor to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.

1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION

A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute's 16-Division format and the MASTERFORMAT numbering system.

B. Language used is the abbreviated type. Implied words and meanings will be appropriately interpreted. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable and where the context so indicates. 1. Requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor.

Subjective language is used to describe responsibilities which must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so noted.

2. The words "shall be" shall be included by inference where a colon (:) is used in a sentence or phrase.

C. Assignment of Specialists: Certain construction activities shall be performed by specialists, recognized experts in the operations to be performed. Specialists must be engaged for those activities, and the assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no option.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01091 Additions and Renovations Reference Standards ENG-12-061 Page 2

Nevertheless, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor.

1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Except where Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards which are referred to in the Specifications and on the Drawings are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference and have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into Contract Documents.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. Indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.

C. Publication Dates: Where a date of issue or edition is not specified, comply with standard in effect on the date of Contract Documents.

D. Conflicting Requirements: Where two or more applicable standards establish different or conflicting requirements, the most stringent requirement will be enforced, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.

E. Copies of Standards: Materials and construction shall be in accordance with the industry standards made applicable by reference to that portion of the work. Where copies of standards are needed for a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source.

F. Abbreviations and Names: Generally recognized acronyms or abbreviations are used in Contract Documents to mean the recognized name of the standards-issuing organization.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01101 Additions and Renovations Alternates ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 01101 ALTERNATES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. An Alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

B. The cost for each Alternate is the net addition to the Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

C. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Materials and methods to be used in the Base Bid and in the Alternates have

been described on the Drawings and in pertinent Sections of these Specifications. 2. Method for stating the proposed Contract Sum is described in the Bid Form.

D. All Alternates described in this Section are required to be reflected on the Bid Form as submitted by Bidders. Do not submit Alternates other than as described in this Section.

E. If the Owner elects to proceed on the basis of one or more of the Alternates, make all modifications to the work required in furnishing and installing the selected Alternates to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner other than as proposed on the Bid Form.

F. All Alternates must be executed with an appropriate response. A “blank space”, or a “No Bid” statement is inappropriate. The space must include a “Specific Sum” or a “No Change in Price” statement. Failure to provide this information may be cause for rejection of the bid at the Owner’s discretion.

PART 2 ALTERNATE 2.1 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES

A. None.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01300 Additions and Renovations Submittals ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Submittals: General term including samples, shop drawings and product data, as applicable and as defined by the General Conditions.

B. General Provisions: 1. Provisions in this section are mandatory procedures for review, approval

and submitting samples, shop drawings and product data in accordance with the General Conditions.

2. Submittals which are received directly from sources other than through the General Contractor's office will be returned to the General Contractor "without action".

3. Job delays occasioned by requirement of re-submission of samples, shop drawings and product data not in accord with Contract Documents and/or submittals sequenced contrary to the agreed schedule are Contractor's responsibility, and will not be considered valid justification for extension of contract time or increase in the contract sum.

1.2 SAMPLE PREPARATION

A. Prepare samples in sizes, shape and finish in accord with provisions of individual specification sections.

B. Samples are not to be confused with full size, on-the-site "Mock-Ups" called for in some specification sections.

C. Samples shall be submitted for the Architect's selection and approval in accordance with the Contractor's submittal schedule or sooner as needed to maintain construction progress. Approvals and color selections will not be made unilaterally where samples or selections of adjacent materials must be made for the purpose of aesthetics. Submit samples for adjacent and interrelated materials concurrently. The Owner will approve all colors before the Architect can take action.

D. The number of samples submitted shall be the number required by the Contractor, plus two (2) which will be retained by the Architect and the Owner, unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 SHOP DRAWING PREPARATION

A. Drawing shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Number sheets consecutively. 2. Indicate working and erection dimensions and relationships to adjacent

work. 3. Show arrangements and sectional views, where applicable. 4. Indicate material, gauges, thicknesses, finishes and characteristics. 5. Indicate anchoring and fastening details, including information for making

connections to adjacent work.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01300 Additions and Renovations Submittals ENG-12-061 Page 2

6. Provide drawings reproducible by normal blue printing; original and prints legible.

7. Indicate working and erection dimensions and relationships to adjacent work. Concurrent submittals of different aspects of work may be required by the Architect as deemed necessary to demonstrate Contractor's ability to understand these relationships and coordinate the Work.

8. Provide 6" x 6" clean space in the lower right hand area for entry of approval stamps.

9. Cross-reference drawing details and specification paragraphs applicable to the submittal data.

10. Do not use blue-colored stamps, ink or pencil on transparencies; “Blue” is not reproducible in blueprinting.

B. Form: Submit one (1) legible sepia transparency and three (3) legible blue line prints of shop drawings.

1.4 PRODUCT DATA PREPARATION

A. Include product manufacturer's standard printed material, dated, with product description and installation instructions indicated. Data not related to this project shall be deleted or marked "VOID" as applicable.

B. Form: Number of copies submitted shall be the number required by Contractor plus two (2) which will be retained by Architect and Owner.

C. Printed material shall be: 1. Legible. 2. Sized no larger than 8-1/2" x 11", suitable for opaque reproduction. 3. Stamped (either on a clean-area space or the reverse side) with the

Contractor's approval actionD. All submitted data shall bear the Contractor's

. approval

action stamp plus his review notes, comments, and corrections as required.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review submittals and stamp with approval prior to submission to the Architect; Contractor's stamp shall bear the Contractor's name, the word "Approved

B. Where work is indicated "By others", Contractor shall indicate responsibility for providing and coordinating such work.

", the signed initials of the approving agent, and the date of his approval action. By so noting, the Contractor indicates that he has reviewed and approves the materials, equipment, quantities and dimensions represented by the particular submittal.

C. Submissions made without Contractor's approval indicated thereon will be returned without being reviewed for compliance with this requirement.

D. Date each submittal and indicate name of Project, Architect, Contractor, Sub-Contractor, as applicable, description or name of equipment, material or product and identify location at which it is to be used in the Work. Cross-reference to specific drawing and specification references.

E. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter containing project name, Contractor's name, number of samples or drawings, titles and other pertinent data. Transmittal shall outline deviations, if any, in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01300 Additions and Renovations Submittals ENG-12-061 Page 3

1.6 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND APPROVAL

A. Architect's Review will be in accordance with the General Conditions. B. Architect will return only the following submittal data to the Contractor for his

further reproduction and distribution. 1. Sepia and one (1) blueline print of shop drawings. 2. Three (3) Copies of opaque product data.

1.7 RESUBMISSION

A. Make corrections and changes indicated for unapproved submissions and resubmit in same manner as specified above, until Architect's approval is obtained.

B. In resubmission transmittal direct specific attention to revisions other than corrections requested by Architect on previous submissions, if any.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for bearing all costs associated with the review and approval process of resubmitted (and/or substituted) submittal data.

1.8 DISTRIBUTION

A. Contractor is responsible for obtaining and distributing copies of submittals to his subcontractors and material suppliers after, as well as before, final approval. Prints of reviewed shop drawings shall be made from transparencies which carry the Architect's appropriate stamp.

B. Contractor shall maintain a file of approved submittals for duration of project, which shall be delivered to Owner as a part of project close-out documents.

C. The Contractor shall maintain a file of all approved submittals, bearing the Stamp of the Architect, at the project site. In the event the Architect or Owner should question the installation of any aspect of the work requiring approved submittal data, the inability of the Superintendent to produce the required approved submittal data upon demand shall constitute cause for a "stop work" order to be issued on that particular questioned aspect of the work and all relevant appurtenant work. The cause shall be equal to the Contractor's not having received required approval of the submittal data. If so issued, such "stop orders" shall not be considered valid justification for extensions of contract time and/or claims for additional monetary compensation.

1.9 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall, within ten (10) calendar days following award of the Contract, submit his proposed schedule of submittals to the Architect for review.

B. The purpose of the schedule is to: 1. Demonstrate that all submittals, shop drawings, data, samples and mock-

ups required for the Work are addressed by the Contractor. 2. Demonstrate consistency with the Contractor's proposed Construction

Schedule. 3. Assist the Architect in scheduling timely review/approval action of

submittals

C. The schedule shall contain the description of the submitted item, the proposed date of submittal and the proposed date of requested return by the Architect.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01300 Additions and Renovations Submittals ENG-12-061 Page 4

D. After the Architect's receipt of the Contractor's submittal schedule, the Architect

and the Contractor shall jointly review the schedule and mutually agree to acceptability or necessary modifications.

E. Contractor shall submit his final accepted schedule within five (5) calendar days after the date of the joint review.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01312 Additions and Renovations Project Meetings ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 01312 PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Project meetings: 1. Regular meetings throughout Project life for discussion and resolution of

Project issues. These meetings will be held on a frequency related to Project status, ie., weekly, bi-weekly, monthly, or others.

2. Attendance by the Contractor, Owner, and Architect is mandatory. Architect’s engineers or consultants, Contractor’s subcontractors, suppliers, and others are to attend on an as-needed basis or as directed by Architect.

3. Suggested agenda: a. Progress review b. Schedule c. Submittal’s status d. Change Order status e. RFI status f. Other business

B. Requirements below are intended for Contractor, subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and material suppliers for discussion and resolution of Project specific situations. Attendance by Owner, Architect, Architect’s engineers or consultants is not mandatory. 1. Meetings between Contractor, Owner, Architect, or any combination of

the three for purpose of discussing Project progress or resolving problems are delineated above.

2. Owner and Architect may attend meetings to ascertain work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules.

C. Contractor requirements include: 1. Schedule and administer preconstruction meeting, periodic progress

meetings, and specially called meetings throughout work progress. 2. Prepare agenda for meetings. 3. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting

date. 4. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 5. Preside at meetings. 6. Record minutes; include significant proceedings and decisions. 7. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three days after each

meeting as follows: a. One copy to each participant in meeting. b. One copy to parties affected by decisions made at meeting. c. Three copies of minutes to Architect. d. One copy to Owner’s representative.

D. Representatives of contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.

E. Related sections:

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01312 Additions and Renovations Project Meetings ENG-12-061 Page 2

1. Section 01310: Construction Schedules 2. Section 01300: Submittals

F. Pre-construction meeting: 1. Schedule within 10 days after date of Notice of Award. 2. Location: Central site, convenient for all parties, designated by the

Owner. 3. Attendance:

a. Owner’s Representative b. Architect and professional consultants. c. Resident Project Representative d. Contractor’s Superintendent e. Major subcontractors. f. Major suppliers. g. Others, as appropriate.

4. Suggested agenda: a. Distribution and discussion of:

i. List of major subcontractors and suppliers. ii. Projected Construction Schedules

b. Critical work sequencing. c. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. d. Project coordination: Designation of responsible personnel. e. Procedures and processing of:

i. Field decisions. ii. Proposal requests. iii. Submittals. iv. Change Orders v. Applications for Payments

f. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. g. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. h. Use of premises:

i. Office, work and storage areas. ii. Owners requirements.

i. Temporary facilities, controls, and construction aids. j. Temporary utilities. k. Safety and first-aid procedures. l. Security procedures. m. Housekeeping procedures. n. Other:

G. Progress meetings: 1. Schedule regular periodic meetings as required, but not less than two

meetings monthly. 2. Hold called meetings as required by progress of work. 3. Meeting’s locations: Project field office of Contractor. 4. Attendance:

a. Subcontractors, as appropriate to agenda. b. Suppliers, as appropriate. c. Architect and professional consultants, as needed or required. d. Others.

5. Suggested agenda: a. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. b. Review of work in progress since previous meeting.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01312 Additions and Renovations Project Meetings ENG-12-061 Page 3

c. Field observations, problems, conflicts. d. Problems which impede Progress Schedule e. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. f. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected

schedule. g. Revisions to Progress Schedule. h. Progress; schedule, during succeeding work period. i. Coordination of schedules. j. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. k. Maintenance of quality standards. l. Pending changes and substitutions. m. Review proposed changes for effect on:

i. Progress schedule and on completion date. ii. Other contracts of Project.

n. Review Monthly Pay Applications o. Other

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01400 Additions and Renovations Testing Laboratory Services ENG-12-061 Page 1 SECTION 01400 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

PART ONE - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION:

A. An independent Testing Laboratory will be provided by the Owner or his representative to inspect and test the materials and methods of construction as hereinafter specified for compliance with the specification requirements of the Contract Documents and to perform such other specialized technical services as may be required by the Owner or his representative.

B. The Owner will pay for the initial laboratory services for testing of materials for compliance

with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor will pay for testing and re-testing of materials that do not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Tests and Inspections shall be conducted in accordance with specified requirements, and if

not specified, in accordance with the applicable standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) or other recognized and accepted authorities in the field.

1.02 QUALIFICATION OF LABORATORY:

A. The Testing Laboratory selected should meet the basic requirements of ASTM E329 “Standard of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction”, shall be inspected and approved by the ELF, FC & PA Joint Technical Committee, Inc. or by an equivalent recognized national authority and shall submit to the Owner, Architect, and the Engineer, a copy of the report of inspection of their facilities.

B. The Testing Laboratory selected shall meet “Recommended Requirements for Independent

Laboratory Qualification”, latest edition, as published by the “American Council of Independent Laboratory Qualification”.

C. Testing machines shall be calibrated at intervals not exceeding 12 months by devices of

accuracy traceable to the National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. The testing laboratory shall submit a copy of certificate of calibration made by an accredited calibration agency.

D. The Testing Laboratory is only required to have testing facilities for work included in this

project

E. The agent of the Testing Laboratory performing field sampling and field testing of concrete shall be certified by the American Concrete Institute as a Concrete Field Testing Technician – Grade 1, or by an equivalent recognized national authority for an equivalent level of competence, or shall be a Licensed Professional Engineer.

1.03 AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF THE LABORATORY:

A. The Testing Laboratory shall obtain and review the project plans and specifications with the Architect and Engineer six (6) weeks prior to the start of construction. The Laboratory shall attend pre-construction conferences with the Architect, Engineer, Project Manager, General Contractor, and Material Suppliers, to coordinate materials inspection and testing

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01400 Additions and Renovations Testing Laboratory Services ENG-12-061 Page 2

requirements with the planned construction schedule. The Laboratory will participate in such conferences throughout the course of the project.

B. The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for outlining a written detailed testing program

conforming to the requirements as specified in the Contract Documents and in consultation with the Owner, Architect, and Engineer. The testing program shall contain an outline of inspections and tests to be performed with reference to applicable sections of the specifications or drawings and a list of personnel assigned to each portion of the work. Such testing program shall be submitted to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer five (5) weeks in advance of the start of construction so as not to delay the start of construction. It shall be the Testing Laboratory’s responsibility that such program conforms to the requirements of the Specifications and falls within the Owner’s budget for testing laboratory services. If the allocated budget is not sufficient to cover the services as outlined in the Specifications, it shall be the responsibility of the Laboratory to notify the Architect, Engineer, and Owner, so the start of Laboratory services can be modified accordingly prior to the start of construction. Furthermore, the Testing Laboratory shall monitor its expenditures throughout the course of the job and notify immediately the Owner, Architect and Engineer, of any significant divination from the planned testing program and budget.

C. The Laboratory shall cooperate with the Architect, Engineer, and Contractor, and provide

qualified personnel promptly on notice.

D. The Laboratory shall perform the required inspections, sampling, and testing of materials as specified under each section and observe methods of construction for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

E. The Laboratory shall notify the Architect and contractor first by telephone, and then in writing,

of observed irregularities and deficiencies of the work and other conditions not in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. The Laboratory shall submit copies of all reports of inspections and test promptly and directly

to the parties named below. All reports shall contain at least the following information: 1. Project Name 2. Date report issued. 3. Testing Laboratory name and address. 4. Name and signature of inspector. 5. Date of inspection and sampling. 6. Date of Test. 7. Identification of product and Specification section. 8. Location in the project. 9. Identification of inspection or test. 10. Record of weather conditions and temperature (if applicable). 11. Results of test regarding compliance with Contract Documents.

G. The Laboratory shall send certified copies of test and inspection reports to the following

parties: 1. Two (2) copies to the Owner or his representative. 2. Two (2) copies to the General Contractor. 3. One (1) copy to the Architect. 4. One (1) copy to the Engineer of responsibility 5. One copy to the Supplier of the material tested.

H. Upon completion of the job, the Testing Laboratory shall furnish to the Owner, Architect, and

Engineer of responsibility, a statement certified by a Notary Public that all required tests and inspections were made in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01400 Additions and Renovations Testing Laboratory Services ENG-12-061 Page 3

I. The Testing Laboratory is not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge upon, or release any

requirements of the Specifications or to approve or accept any portion of the work or to perform any duties of the General Contractor and his Subcontractors.

1.04 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY:

A. The Contractor shall cooperate with Laboratory personnel, provide access to the work, and to

manufacturer’s operations. B. The Contractor shall provide to the Laboratory representative, samples of materials proposed

for use in the work in quantities sufficient for accurate testing as specified.

C. The Contractor shall furnish casual labor, equipment, and facilities as required for sampling and testing by the Laboratory and otherwise facilitate all required inspections and tests.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Testing Laboratory sufficiently in

advance of operations to allow for assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

E. The Contractor shall arrange with the Testing Laboratory and pay for any additional samples and tests above those required by the Contract Documents as requested by the Contractor for his convenience in performing the work.

F. The Contractor shall pay for any additional inspections, sampling, testing, and re-testing as

required when initial tests indicate work does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

G. The Contractor shall furnish and pay for the following items:

1. Soil survey of the location of borrow soil materials, samples of existing soil materials, and delivery to the Testing Laboratory.

2. Samples of concrete aggregates and delivery to the Testing Laboratory. 3. Concrete Coring, tests of below-strength concrete, and load tests, if ordered by the

Owner, Architect, and/or Engineer. 4. Certification of reinforcing steel mill order. 5. Certification of structural steel mill order. 6. Certification of Portland cement. 7. Certification of welders. 8. Tests, samples, and mock-ups of substitute material where the substitution is

requested by the Contractor, and the tests are necessary in the opinion of the Owner, Architect, or Engineer to establish equality with specified items.

9. Any other tests when such costs are required by the Contract Documents to be paid by the Contractor.

H. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Owner, the Architect, the Engineer, and

the Testing Laboratory when the source of any material is changed after the original tests or inspections have been made.

I. If in the opinion of the Owner, Architect or Engineer, any of the work of the contractor is not

satisfactory, the Contractor shall make all tests that the Owner, Architect, or Engineer deem advisable to determine its proper construction. The Owner shall pay all costs if the tests prove the questioned work to be satisfactory.

1.05 EXTENT OF SERVICES FOR EARTHWORK:

A. Moisture Density Relationship for Natural and Fill Materials:

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01400 Additions and Renovations Testing Laboratory Services ENG-12-061 Page 4

1. The Testing Laboratory will provide one (1) optimum moisture density curve for each type of soil, natural, imported fill, or on-site fill, encountered in subgrade and fills under building slabs and paved areas. Curves shall be generated in accordance with ASTM D698.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01400 Additions and Renovations Testing Laboratory Services ENG-12-061 Page 5 B.

1. The Testing Laboratory shall inspect and approve the following subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed there on:

Quality Control Testing Required During Construction:

a. Paved Areas and Building slab Subgrade

b.

: Make at least one (1) field density test of the natural density test of the natural subgrade for every 2,500 square feet of paved area or building slab, but in no case less than three (3) tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one (1) field density test for every 2,500 square of building slab on paved area, but in no case less than three (3) tests. Foundation Wall Backfill

2. Field Density Test shall be run according to ASTM D1556 (Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method), ASTM D2167) (Density of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method) or ASTM D2922 (Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods) as applicable.

: Make at least one (1) field density test for each 200 lineal feet of all with a minimum of four (4) tests for each basement wall around the perimeter of the building and a minimum of one (1) test for every other type of foundation wall on the site. Tests shall be at random locations and elevations for each wall.

3. The results of field density tests by the Testing Laboratory will not be considered satisfactory unless their value meet the required density.

4. The Testing Laboratory shall submit all moisture density curves and results of field density tests to the parties listed under Section 1.03G.

5. If reports by the Testing Laboratory indicate field densities lower than specified above, additional tests will be run by the Testing Laboratory with at least the frequencies scheduled above on re-compacted fill and/or natural subgrade. The Testing Laboratory shall notify the Contractor on a timely basis for any required re-testing so as not to delay the work. The costs of such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.

6. The Geotechnical Engineer shall provide inspection service of each dug footing subgrade prior to pouring foundation concrete. Such inspection shall verify that field conditions are consistent with soil report test results and that the foundation is being installed in the proper soil strata at the proper elevation. The Geotechnical Engineer shall submit written field inspection reports promptly after inspection to all parties listed in 1.3 G, and report his findings after each inspection by telephone to the Structural Engineer.

1.06 EXTENT OF SERVICE FOR CONCRETE MATERIALS AND POURED IN-PLACE CONCRETE:

A. 1. Cylinders for strength tests shall be molded and laboratory cured in accordance with

ASTM C31 “Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Cylinders in the Field” and tested in accordance with ASTM C39 “Method of Testing for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens”.

Concrete Test Cylinders:

2. Field samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172 “Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete”.

3. Frequency of Testing

a. One (1) set for each class of concrete taken not less than once a day.

: Each set of test cylinders shall consist of a minimum of four (4) standard test cylinders. A set of test cylinders shall be made according to the following frequency:

b. For walls and floors, one (1) set for each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof not less than one (1) set for each 5,000 square feet of surface area.

c. For columns, one (1) set for each 150 cubic yards or fraction thereof with a minimum of two (2) sets per floor.

d. For all other concrete, a minimum of one (1) set for each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01400 Additions and Renovations Testing Laboratory Services ENG-12-061 Page 6

e. No more than one (1) set of cylinders at a time shall be made from any single truck.

f. If the total volume of concrete is such that the frequency of testing as specified above would provide less than five (5) strength tests for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least five (5) randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five batches are used.

g. The above frequencies assume that one (1) batch plant will be used for each pour. If more than one (1) batch plant is used, the frequencies cited above shall apply for each plant used.

The cylinders shall be numbered, dated, and the point of concrete placement in the building recorded. Of the four (4) cylinders per set, break one at seven days, two at 28 days, and one automatically at 56 days if either 28 day cylinder break is below required strength. One (1) additional cylinder per set will be required for formed slab and pan joist floors for the purpose of evaluating the concrete strength at the time of form stripping. The cylinder shall be stored on the floor where form removal is to occur under the same exposure conditions as the floor concrete. This cylinder shall be cured under field conditions in accordance with ASTM C31 “Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimen in the Field”. Field cured test cylinders shall be molded at the same time and from the same samples as laboratory cured test specimens. This cylinder shall be broken at the time of form removal as directed by the Contractor.

4. For concrete with design strength in excess of 5,000 PSI, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing a temperature controlled and protected concrete cylinder storage box at a point on the job site mutually agreeable with the Testing Laboratory for the purpose of storing concrete cylinders until they are transported to the Laboratory.

5. The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for transporting the cylinders to the Laboratory in a protected environment such that no damage or ill effect will occur to the concrete cylinders.

6. The Testing Laboratory shall make and distribute concrete test reports after each job cylinder is broken. Such reports shall contain the following information: a. Truck number and ticket number. b. Concrete Batch Plant c. Mix design number. d. Accurate location of pour in the structure. e. Strength requirement. f. Date cylinders made and broken. g. Technician making cylinders. h. Concrete temperature at placing. i. Air temperature at point of placement in the structure. j. Amount of water added to the truck at the batch plant and at the site. k. Slump l. Unit weight. m. Air Content n. Cylinder compressive strengths with type of failure if concrete does not meet

Specification requirements. Seven (7) day breaks are not to be flagged if they are less than 70% of the required 28 day strength. 28 day breaks are to be flagged if either cylinder fails to meet Specification requirements.

B. Other Tests of Concrete Required by the Testing Laboratory:

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01400 Additions and Renovations Testing Laboratory Services ENG-12-061 Page 7

1. Slump tests (ASTM C143) shall be made at the beginning of concrete placement for each batch plant and for each set of test cylinders made.

2. Air entrainment (ASTM C233) tests shall be made at the same time slump tests are made as cited above.

3. Concrete Temperature at placment at the same time slump tests are made as cited above.

B. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete

1. A strength test shall be defined as the average strength of two (2) 28-day cylinder breaks from each set of cylinders.

:

2. The strength level of an individual class of concrete shall be considered satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met: a. The average of all sets of three (3) consecutive strength tests equal or

exceed the required f’c. b. No individual strength tests (average of two (2) 28-day cylinder breaks) fall

below the required f’c by more than 500 PSI. c. If either of the above requirements is not met, the Testing Laboratory shall

immediately notify the Engineer by telephone. Steps shall immediately be taken to increase the average of subsequent strength tests.

D. Investigation of Low Strength Concrete Test Results

:

1. If any strength test of laboratory cured cylinders fall below the required f’c by more than 500 PSI , the Contractor shall take steps immediately to assure that the load carryng capacity of the structure is not jeopardized.

2. The Testing Laboratory shall, under the direction of the Engineer, perform non-destructive field test of the concrete in question using Swiss Hammer, Windsor Probe, or other appropriate methods and report the results the same as for cylinder test reports.

3. If the likelihood of low strength concrete is confirmed and computations indicate that the load carrying capacity of the structure has been significantly reduced, tests of cores drilled from the area in question under the direction of the Engineer will be required in accordance with ASTM C42 (Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Saws Beams of Concrete). In such case, three (3) cores shall be taken for each strength test more than 500 PSI below required f’c. If concrete in the structure will be dry under service conditions, cores shall be air dried (temperature 60° to 80°, relatively humidity less than 60 percent) for seven (7) days before test and shall be tested dry. If concrete in the structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, cores shall be immersed in water for at least 48 hours and tested wet. The Contractor shall fill all holes made by drilling cores with an approved dry-pack concrete.

4. Concrete in an area represented by core test shall be considered structurally adequate if the average of three (3) cores is equal to at least 85% of f’c and if no single core is less than 75% of f’c. To check testing accuracy, locations of erratic core strengths may be re-tested.

5. If the above criteria are not met, and the structure adequacy remains in doubt, the Engineer may order a load test, as specified in ACI 318 for the questionable portion of the structure.

6. If the structural adequacy of the affected portion of the structure remains in doubt, the Engineer may order the structure to be strengthened by an appropriate means or torn down and re-built.

7. The costs of all investigations of low strength concrete shall be borne by the Contractor.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01400 Additions and Renovations Testing Laboratory Services ENG-12-061 Page 8

E. Job Site Inspection by the Testing Laboratory: The scope of the work to be perfomred by the inspector on the job site shall be as follows1. Verify that air temperatures at the point of placement in the structure are within

acceptable limits defined in Section J prior to ordering of concrete by the Contractor.

:

2. Inspect concrete upon arrival to verify that the proper concrete mix number, type of concrete, and concrete strength is being placed at the proper location.

3. Inspect plastic concrete upon arrival at the job site to verify proper batching. The responsibility for adding water to trucks at the job site shall rest only with a duly appointed representative mutually agreeable to the Contractor, Owner, and Engineer, prior to the start of any concrete operations.

4. Obtain concrete test cylinders as specified in Sections D.1 and D.2. 5. Perform slump tests and air entrainment tests as specified in Section D.6. 6. Record information for concrete test reports as specified in Section D.6 7. Verify that all concrete being placed meets job Specifications. Reject concrete not

meeting the requirements of Section K and immediately notify the Contractor, Batch Plant Inspector, Architect , Engineer, and Owner.

8. Pick up and transport to Laboratory, cylinders cast the previous day. 9. Check concrete placing techniques to determine that concrete deposited is uniform

and that vertical drop does not exceed six feet. 10. The job site inspector shall report any irregularities that occur in the concrete at the

job site or test results to the Contractor, Architect, Owner, and Engineer. F. Causes for Rejection of Concrete Delivered to the Site

:

A duly appointed representative agreeable to the Architect, Owner, and Engineer, shall reject all concrete delivered to the site for any of the following reasons: 1. Wrong class of concrete (incorrect mix design number). 2. Air Temperature: Air temperature limits shall be as follows:

a. Cold Weather: Air temperature must be 40°F. and rising. b. Hot Weather: Air temperature must be cooler than 100°F.

Concrete may be placed at other air temperature ranges only with approval to the duly appointed representative.

3. Concrete with temperatures exceeding 95° F. may not be placed in the structure without approval of the job inspector for the Testing Laboratory or other duly appointed representative.

4. Air contents outside the limits specified in the mix designs. 5. Slumps outside the limits specified in Section C.6 or the mix designs. 6. Excessive Age: Concrete shall be discharged within 90 minutes of plant departure

or before it begins to set if sooner than 90 minutes unless approved by the Laboratory job inspector or other duly appointed representative.

1.07 EXTENT OF SERVICES FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL AND RELATED WORK:

A. Contract Obligations1.

: Owner Responsibility:

2.

The Owner shall pay for all initial shop and field inspecitons and tests are required during the fabrication and erection of the structural steel. Contractor Responsibility:

3.

The Contractor shall pay for and arrange with the Testing Laboratory for the certification of all shop and field welders. The costs of all re-testing of material or workmanship not in conformance with the Contract Documents shall be borne by the Contractor. The Fabricator and Erector shall provide:

4.

the laboratory inspector with access to all places where work is being done. A minimum of 24 hours notification shall be given prior to commencement of work. Testing Laboratory Responsibility: The inspection of shop work by the Testing Laboratory shall be performed in the Fabricator's shop to the fullest extent possible. Such inspections shall be in sequence, timely, and performed in such a manner as

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01400 Additions and Renovations Testing Laboratory Services ENG-12-061 Page 9

to minimize disruptions in operations and to permit the repair of all non-conforming work while the materials in process in the fabricating shop. Inspection of field work shall be completed prompted so that corrections can be made without delaying the progress of the work. The Testing Laboratory shall provide test reports of all shop and field inspections. Shop test reports shall include shop welders certifications.

All test reports shall indicate types and locations of all defects found during inspection, the measures required and performed to correct such defects, statements of final approval of all welding and bolting of shop and field connections. In addition to the parties listed in Section 1.03.G, the fabricator and erector shall receive copies of all test reports.

5. The Architect, Engineer, and Testing Laboratory reserve the right to reject any material or workmanship not in conformance with the Contract Documents at any time during the progress of the work. However, this provision does not allow waiving the obligation for timely, in sequence inspection.

B. Mill Tests of Structural Steel1. Mill Order Steel: The Fabricator shall furnish certified mill test reports and an

affidavit stating that the structural steel furnished meets the requirements of the grade specified on the structural drawings for all mill order steel. In case of controversy, certified reports of tests, according to ASTM A6 or A568 as applicable, made by the Owner’s Testing Laboratory, paid for by the Contractor, shall be made to verify conformity with ASTM standards.

:

2. Local Stock Steel: Materials taken from stock by a Fabricator for use for structural purposes must be of a quality at least equal to that required by the ASTM specifications applicable to the classification covering the intended use.

3. Certified mill test reports shall be accepted as sufficient record of the quality of materials carried in stock by the fabricator. In case of controversy, certified reports as specified for mill order steel shall be required.

4. If tests are required, test specimens shall be taken by the Contractor under the direction of the Testing Laboratory and shall be machined by the Testing Laboratory to dimensions as required by the applicable ASTM standards.

C. Shop Inspections and Tests

:

The Testing Laboratory shall provide inspection at the designated fabrication shops for the designated periods of time to perform shop inspection and tests. The designated fabrication shops and time periods of inspections shall be determined in consultation with the Architect, Owner, and Engineer prior to the start of fabrication in a timely manner so as not to delay the fabrication process. The following tests and inspections shall be performed. 1. Review shop drawings and shop procedures with fabricator’s supervisory personnel. 2. Review welding procedures and obtain welder certificates. 3. Verify welding electrodes to be used and other welding consumables as the job

progresses. 4. Provide inspection of surface preparation for coating and coating operations.

D. Field Inspections and Tests

:

The Testing Laboratory shall provide inspection in the field for a period of time as determined in consultation with the Architect, Owner, and Engineer prior to the start of erection in a timely manner so as to not delay the start of erection. The following tests and inspections shall be made: 1. Obtain the planned erection procedure, and review with the Erector’s supervisory

personnel.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01400 Additions and Renovations Testing Laboratory Services ENG-12-061 Page 10

2. Check the installation of base plates for proper leveling, grout type, and grout application.

3. Verify field welding procedures and obtain welder certificates. 4. Check steel as received in the field for possible shipping damage, workmanship, and

piece marking. 5. Check plumbing and frame alignment as erection progresses. 6. Check required camber of floor beams. 7. Check joint preparation and fit up, backing strips, and run-out plates for welded

moment connections and column splices. 8. Check pre-heating to assure proper temperature, uniformity, and thoroughness

through the full material thickness. 9. Review welding sequence. 10. Visually inspect field welding for size, length, and quality. 11. Perform non-destructive examination services for various weldments of field

erections determined in consultation with the Structural Engineer prior to the start of erection. The laboratory shall furnish a qualified technician with the necessary equipment to perform radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle, or dye penetrant inspection as required for the item being tested and other duties as outlined for shop inspection in Section C.12.

12. Check calibrartion of impact wrenches used in field bolted connections. 13. Check high strength field bolted connections according to inspection procedures

outlined in the “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts”. Unless specified otherwise, test one (1) bolt in 10% of the bolted connections. If that bolt is found to be improperly tightened, test all bolts in the connection.

14. Visually inspect the welding of metal deck to the structure. 15. Perform field tests on 10% of completed shear connectors according to inspection

procedures outlined in AWS D1.1.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01500 Additions and Renovations Temporary Services ENG-12-061 Page 1 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

PART ONE - GENERAL

1.01 FACILITIES:

A. Temporary Offices: Provide sufficient space for Contractor's personnel. 1. Provide temporary office facilities complete with lighting, heating and air conditioning

and telephone service. 2. Location of temporary office shall be subject to Architect's acceptance.

B. Temporary Storage Facilities: Install storage and fabrication sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service. Sheds may be open shelters of fully enclosed spaces. Locations and adequacy of storage facilities shall be subject to Architect's approval.

C. Electrical Service: Provide temporary electrical service, including extensions and connections necessary for construction work. Pay costs of installing and maintaining service for duration of project. Pay costs associated with use of permanent electrical system until Date of Substantial Completion.

D. Temporary Lighting: Provide the following minimum light levels for construction purposes. 1. General Construction and Safety Lighting: Five (5) footcandles. 2. Finishing Work and Testing: twenty-five (25) footcandles.

E. Temporary Heat and Ventilation: 1. Provide temporary heat in enclosed spaces to provide minimum temperatures of

40°F. until time finishing work begins. 2. After building is totally enclosed and installation of finishes begins, maintain spaces

in a temperature range of 60°F. to 80°F. at all times, except as may otherwise be required by product manufacturers for proper product installation and performance. Maintain until Date of Substantial Completion.

3. Maintain relative humidity in a range of 50% to 65% in enclosed spaces after building is enclosed and installation of finishes begin; except as may otherwise be required by product manufacturers for proper product installation and performance.

4. Provide ventilation to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes or gases and to properly cure materials and disperse humidity.

F. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service to temporary offices for duration of project. Pay costs for installation and for local services. Toll calls shall be paid for by person making call.

G. Water Service: Provide temporary water for construction purposes, including extensions and connections necessary for work. Pay costs of installation and maintaining service for duration of project. Pay costs associated with use of permanent water system until Date of Substantial Completion.

H. Sanitary Toilet Facilities: Provide and maintain temporary toilet facilities for construction personnel. Permanent new facilities may not be used by personnel. During work at existing facilities, under no circumstances will workmen be allowed to use any student or teacher toilet facility within the building.

I. Relocate temporary facilities during construction as required by progress of the Work at no additional cost to the Owner.

J. Where work is performed with-in an existing building, water, electrical and gas will be paid for by the owner (where possible to use convenience outlets with-in the building without disturbing school operations).

K. At completion of Work, or at time of permanent utility connections, as applicable, remove temporary facilities, including connections and debris resulting from temporary installation.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01500 Additions and Renovations Temporary Services ENG-12-061 Page 2 1.02 STAGING AREA:

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing staging areas WITHIN the designated Limit of Work area for this Contract; no staging or materials storage will be permitted outside the Limit of Work area.

B. The Contractor is solely responsible for all security, protection, safeguards, etc. of materials and personnel within the established staging area (areas).

1.03 TEMPORARY CONTROLS:

A. Noise Control: Contractor shall make every effort to effect a satisfactory noise abatement program during school hours. Use sound deadening materials where required to reduce disturbances to classroom in session.

B. Dust Control: Where cutting or removing materials which will generate dust and dirt, the Contractor shall provide temporary dust curtains, solid barricades, or the like, to retain and control dust relative to the area in which work is occurring. Clean areas of dust as practicable so as not to allow its spread by pedestrian traffic.

1.04 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES: The Contractor is reminded that the Project is limited by its

nature to certain physical areas of each facility. The facilities may be fully occupied (except as provided for work areas) while the work progresses. Therefore, restrict personnel to areas of each facility where their presence is required by the work to be performed. The Contractor's personnel shall not fraternize with students and school personnel.

1.05 EXISTING BUILDING AND PARTIALLY OCCUPIED NEW BUILDING SECURITY:

A. Contractor is responsible for operating in a manner that will maintain the security of the

existing building and its contents. B. Any temporary barriers between new work and existing must be secured with solid temporary

walls. C. Required emergency exit ways shall be maintained at all times. D. Should the Contractor work in the existing building at times that school personnel are not

present, Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the building. Before leaving, Contractor shall check all doors, windows, etc. to be certain that they are closed, locked and secure. Contractor shall leave premises in a condition to allow normal operation of school functions.

1.06 PROJECT SIGNS:

A. Contractor will coordinate placement with the Principal or Site Supervisor. B. The Contractor shall provide, furnish and install 4’x8’ project sign with graphics provided by

the Architect.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01600 Additions and Renovations Materials and Equipment ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this Section are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties", "systems", "structure", "finishes", "accessories", and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether

produced for the Project or taken from previously produced stock. The term "product" includes "material", "equipment", "system", and terms of similar intent.

2. "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents.

3. "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.

4. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that usually, but not necessarily, requires service connections such as wiring or piping.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a single source.

B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with other products.

C. Labels and Nameplates: Unless required for evidence of compliance and to display essential operating data, labels and nameplates shall be concealed in the completed construction. 1. Labels - Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or,

where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates - Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain essential operating data.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01600 Additions and Renovations Materials and Equipment ENG-12-061 Page 2

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. General: Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft.

B. Delivery: 1. Schedule delivery to avoid long-term storage at the site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction and storage spaces. 2. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original packaging with labels

and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing. C. Inspection: Inspect products upon delivery to ensure that they comply with

requirements and are undamaged and properly protected. D. Storage: Store products at the site to facilitate inspection and measurement of

quantity or counting of units. 1. Store heavy products in a manner that will not endanger the supporting

construction. 2. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover

in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and (unless otherwise specified or permitted) previously unused. 1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and

other devices and details for complete installation and for the intended use and effect.

2. Where available, provide standard product types that have been used successfully in similar situations.

3. As is specified in Section 01090, quantity or quality levels shown and specified represent minimum acceptable levels.

B. Product Selection: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents and governing regulations. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where one or more products or

manufacturers are named, with a stated requirement for approval of equals, provide one of the products indicated or approved by the Architect prior to bidding. No substitutions will be permitted except as provided in General Conditions Article 7 for changes in the work.

2. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a manufacturer's name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements.

3. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, with or without use of a manufacturer's name, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Appropriate overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific application.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01600 Additions and Renovations Materials and Equipment ENG-12-061 Page 3

4. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified.

5. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established

Sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.

6. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase, the Architect will select the color, pattern and texture.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS

A. General: Comply with PART 3 - EXECUTION of Section 01040 for installation of products. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. 1. Obtain and distribute copies of manufacturers' instructions to installers. Include

two (2) information copies to Owner and Architect. Maintain one complete set of instructions at job site during installation, and include one complete set of instructions in final record information specified in Section 01700.

2. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and specified requirements. a. Consult with Architect for clarification in case of conflict between

manufacturers' instructions and job conditions or specified requirements. b. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. c. Do not omit manufactuer-recommended preparations or installation

procedures unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.

3. Manufacturers' printed installation instructions, when specified or approved by the Architect, shall be a basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting installation methods used in performing the work.

C. Preliminary Procedures: 1. Inspect products immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation.

Reject damaged and defective items. 2. Verify measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation.

D. Protection: 1. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will

ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration.

2. Protect products being installed and adjacent construction during and after installation, until acceptance, to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.

3. Coordinate the erection of temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for those purposes.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01600 Additions and Renovations Materials and Equipment ENG-12-061 Page 4

E. Attachment: 1. Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at

standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated. Refer conflicts and questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision.

2. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for

securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for thermal and building movement.

F. Replacement and Repair: 1. Promptly remove damaged, defective and non-conforming products and

acceptably replace with new. 2. Subject to Architect's approval, damaged and defective products may be

repaired to condition equivalent to acceptable new condition. Products that cannot be satisfactorily repaired shall be removed and replaced.

3. Replacement and repairs shall be made by the party responsible for the original installation, without additional cost to the Owner.

4. Refer to General Conditions 12.3 for Owner's option to accept defective and non-conforming work.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01630 Additions and Renovations Substitutions ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 01630 SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Substitutions for products specified shall be allowed only under the conditions

stated in this section. 1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS/PRIOR APPROVALS

A. If it is desired to use products different from those indicated in the Contract Documents, the party requesting the substitution shall make written application as described herein. The burden of proving equality of proposed substitutions rests on the party making the request for substitution.

Requests for substitution shall reach the Architect not less than seven (7) working days prior to the date for opening of bids. Requests received by the Architect after this date will not be considered.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Date of request. 2. Name of party proposing substitution. 3. Project name. 4. Specification reference. 5. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with

requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and

address. b. Manufacturer's literature, identify:

(1) Product description. (2) Reference standards. (3) Performance and test data. (4) Manufacturer's recommendations for use and installation.

c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been

used, and date of each installation. 6. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified,

list all variations. 7. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 8. Any effect of substitution on separate contracts. 9. List of changes required in other work or products. 10. Designation of required license fees or royalties. 11. Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources of

replacement materials.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01630 Additions and Renovations Substitutions ENG-12-061 Page 2

B. If a proposed substitution is approved by the Architect, an addendum will be issued to prospective bidders not less than three (3) days prior to the date set for opening bids. If a substitution does not appear in an addendum it shall mean that the Architect has not approved the product and the successful bidder shall be responsible for furnishing materials and products in accordance with the Contract Documents. Following the receipt of bids, no further requests for substitution of products or materials will be considered.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION

A. In connection with the use of any substitute item approved by the Architect it

shall be the General Contractor's responsibility to see that such items meet all space requirements, and that any alterations to connecting items necessitated by use of the alternate items are properly made at no increase in cost to the Owner, and that all items are in compliance with the specification requirements. Contractor shall waive all claims for additional costs caused by substitutions which may subsequently become apparent.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01650 Additions and Renovations Project Record Documents ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 01650 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Maintain at Project Site for Owner, one (1) record copy of: 1. Drawings. 2. Project Manual/Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to Contract. 5. Field Orders or written instructions. 6. Approved and Approved As Noted Shop Drawings, Product Data and

Samples. 7. Field Test Records.

B. Make Record Documents available to Architect. C. Submit final Record Documents with Closeout Documents.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Make entries within twenty-four (24) hours after receipt of information except note dimensional corrections and new dimensional data immediately upon determination.

B. Do not permit record sets to be used for any other purpose. 1.3 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Field Record Drawings: One complete set of Drawings upon which all changes

to Work are recorded daily with colored pencil to provide accurate, factual information relative to Work as constructed, both visible and concealed. Entries shall be made on line prints provided by Architect with each sheet bearing rubber stamp impression reading "Record Drawings".

1. Identify entry by "cloud" type circle around affected Work. Initial and date each entry.

2. Record the following: a. Horizontal location and elevation of underground portions of

Work. b. Location, size and arrangement of concealed mechanical and

electrical portions of Work, including conduit, piping, valves, ductwork, outlets, and equipment.

c. Location, size and arrangement of exposed mechanical and electrical portions of Work.

d. Changes and corrections to dimensions. e. Changes to materials, products, equipment and finishes. f. Changes and deviations in Work from that indicated in Contract

Documents. g. Identify equipment, valves, piping, conduit, fixtures and devices

using symbols and designations corresponding to those used in Contract Documents.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01650 Additions and Renovations Project Record Documents ENG-12-061 Page 2

B. Final Record Drawings: One complete bond set of Field Record Drawings. C. Field Record Specifications: One complete set of Project Manual/Specifications

within which changes to materials, products, equipment, and systems are recorded; also, note which specified manufacturer was used. Make corrections with colored pencil and mark the Manual "Record Specifications" on outside back binding.

D. Final Record Specifications: Either Field Record Specifications volume or new set of Specifications bearing all changes transferred from Field Record Specifications.

E. Updated Revit Model with integrated as-built conditions. Architect shall provide Revit Model to be edited.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01700 Additions and Renovations Contract Closeout ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Requirements of this Section amplify and do not modify provisions of the

General Conditions. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout.

B. Completion requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Division -2 through -16.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of

Substantial Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements. 2. Submit warranties and lists, workmanship bonds, maintenance

agreements, final certifications and similar documents. 3. Submit consent of surety to reduction of retainage, if applicable. 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the

Work and access to services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases.

5. Submit record documents and other final record information as applicable and required for the project. Refer to Paragraph 1.5 of this Section.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock and similar items. 7. Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the

Owner. Advise the Owner's personnel of change-over in security provisions.

8. Perform complete start-up testing and balancing of systems and submit reports to the Architect. Instruct the Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance procedures.

9. Discontinue and remove construction mock-ups and similar elements. 10. Remove temporary facilities, construction equipment, and temporary

services. Restore disturbed items to original condition, or better. 11. Complete final clean up requirements. Touch-up and otherwise repair

and restore marred exposed finishes. 12. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date of

Substantial Completion, or when the Owner took possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the work.

B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01700 Additions and Renovations Contract Closeout ENG-12-061 Page 2

inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.

1. The Architect will perform inspection when assured that the Work has been substantially completed. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements of

final acceptance. 3. After substantial completion has been met, the Architect will furnish the

Contractor with a "Punch List" of any items found incomplete or not in conformance with the contract documents. The Contractor shall remedy such defects within thirty (30) days of his receipt of the list, and the Architect will make one (1) subsequent inspection of the work. Should additional inspections of the work be required due to the failure of the Contractor to remedy defects listed, the Owner may deduct the expense of any additional inspections from the contract amount. The additional expense will be based on a rate of $80.00 per hour for the Architect and any consultants.

1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: Submit to Architect in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions.

B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following. 1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting

documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required.

2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.

3. Submit properly executed Lien and Privilege Certificate. 4. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be

completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Architect.

5. Submit consent of surety to final payment, if applicable. 6. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement, if applicable. 7. Submit evidence that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid.

8. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. C. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of

notice that the Work, including items from earlier inspections, has been completed.

1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled, but are required for final acceptance.

2. Should more than one reinspection for Final Acceptance be required due to the failure of the Contractor to remedy listed defects, the Owner may deduct the expense of any additional inspections from the Contract Amount. The additional expense will be based on a rate of $80.00 per hour for the Architect and any consultants.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01700 Additions and Renovations Contract Closeout ENG-12-061 Page 3

1.5 FINAL RECORD INFORMATION

A. General: 1. Maintain one set of record documents in accordance with General

Conditions 3.11. 2. Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from

deterioration and loss; provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3. Prepare and submit to the Architect additional record information as specified.

B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue- or black-line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most suitable for showing conditions fully and accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.

1. Record, as a minimum, the following information that is applicable to the project:

a. Depths of various foundation elements in relation to finish first floor datum.

b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.

c. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances which are concealed in the completed construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of structure.

d. Field changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes made by Change Order and Architect's instructions for

changes which do not effect Contract amount or time. f. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.

2. Comply with the following procedures for recording information: a. Mark record sets with erasable pencil; use red for marking, or use

other colors to distinguish between separate categories of the Work. b. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable.

c. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set.

C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents such as Change Orders and modifications issued in written form during construction. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options and similar information on elements that cannot be readily identified by direct observation. Note related Record Drawing information and Product Data.

D. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal, including items submitted for record purposes. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site, and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work which cannot otherwise

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01700 Additions and Renovations Contract Closeout ENG-12-061 Page 4

be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related Change Orders and mark-up of record drawings and Specifications.

E. Record Samples: Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall meet at the site with the Architect and the Owner's personnel to determine which of the submitted Samples that have been maintained during progress of the Work are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Deliver selected samples to the Owner's storage area. Contractor shall dispose of samples not selected for Owner's records.

F. Miscellaneous Records: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference.

G. Maintenance Manuals: Unless otherwise specified in the Technical Sections, provide two (2) sets of maintenance manuals for the project, incorporating all maintenance, repair and operating procedures specified for the project. Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in heavy-duty 3-ring vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information:

Emergency instructions. Spare parts list. Wiring diagrams. Recommended "turn-around" cycles. Inspection procedures. Shop Drawings and Product Data. Fixture lamping schedule. Maintenance and repair procedures.

H. Warranties and Lists: Submit the following documents as specified in Section 01740: 1. Warranties and Service Contracts.

2. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials I. Submittal: Upon completion of the work, transmit all record documents and

maintenance manuals to the Architect for the Owner's records

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment and material that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives. Include a detailed review of the following items:

Maintenance manuals and record documents. Inspection procedures.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01700 Additions and Renovations Contract Closeout ENG-12-061 Page 5

Spare parts and materials. Tools. Lubricants. Identification systems. Control sequences. Personal and product safety. Cleaning. Warranties and bonds. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.

B. Demonstration: As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures:

Start-up. Shut-down. Emergency operations. Noise and vibration adjustments. Safety procedures. Economy and efficiency adjustments. Effective energy utilization.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included in Section "Temporary Facilities". Final cleaning specified in this Section 01700 applies to new and existing construction within the renovation area and portions of the site used by the Contractor for access, storage and other construction purposes.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and requirements in individual Specifications Sections. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. 1. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, and

other excess and foreign materials from exposed-to-view interior and exterior surfaces, new and existing.

2. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. 3. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and

windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace scratched, cracked, chipped and broken glass and other damaged and defective transparent materials.

4. Clean exposed exterior and interior finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore glossy and reflective surfaces to their original condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.

5. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 01700 Additions and Renovations Contract Closeout ENG-12-061 Page 6

6. Clean and renovate permanent equipment that has been used during the construction period, including but not limited to the following: a. Replace temporary construction air filters with permanent filters

and pleats, and clean inside of ductwork and housings. b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts that have been subject

to unusual operating conditions. c. Replace lamps that are burned out or noticeably dimmed by use. d. Re-install existing items which were removed during construction.

7. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even-textured surface.

A. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction.

B. Owner's Right to Clean Up: If the Contractor fails to perform final cleaning and removal of protection as specified, and fails to promptly and diligently commence and continue specified cleaning and removal after written notice by the Owner or Architect, the Owner may execute such cleaning and removal and deduct by appropriate Change Order the cost of the cleaning and removal from the Contract Amount. This right of the Owner, if exercised, shall be exercised without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have under the Contract Documents or law.

C. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not abandon or bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful and dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.

D. Materials for Owner's Use: Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of Work have become the Owner's property, and where extra stock of materials are required by the Contract Documents, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 02

SITEWORK

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02100 Additions and Renovations Site Preparation ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section covers clearing, grubbing, and stripping along the construction site. B. The Contractor shall clear and grub all of the area within the limits of

construction or as required, which includes, but is not limited to, utility easements (servitudes). The width of the area to be cleared shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to the beginning of any clearing.

C. The Contractor’s attention is directed to any Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Ordinances in force in the Parish. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable sections of these ordinances.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CLEARING

A. The surface of the ground, for the area to be cleared and grubbed, shall be completely cleared of all timber, brush, stumps, roots, grass, weeds, rubbish, and all other objectionable obstructions resting on or protruding through the surface of the ground. However, those trees which are designated by the Engineer shall be preserved as hereinafter specified. Clearing operations shall be conducted so as to prevent damage to existing structures and installations, and to those under construction, so as to provide for the safety of employees and others.

3.2 GRUBBING

A. Grubbing shall consist of the complete removal of all stumps, roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter, matted roots, brush, timber, logs, and any other organic or metallic debris not suitable for foundation purposes, resting on, under or protruding through the surface of the ground to a depth of 18 inches below the subgrade. All depressions excavated below the original ground surface for or by the removal of such objects, shall be refilled with suitable materials and compacted to a density conforming to the surrounding ground surface.

3.3 STRIPPING

A. In areas so designated, topsoil shall be stockpiled. Topsoil so stockpiled shall be protected until it is placed as specified. Any topsoil remaining after all work is in place shall be disposed of by the Contractor.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02100 Additions and Renovations Site Preparation ENG-12-061 Page 2

3.4 DISPOSAL OF CLEARED AND GRUBBED MATERIAL

A. The Contractor shall disposed of all material and debris from the clearing and grubbing operation by hauling such material and debris off site. The cost of disposal (including hauling) of cleared and grubbed material and debris shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor; the cost of which shall be included in the contract prices for the various classes of work.

3.5 PRESERVATION OF TREES

A. Those trees of which are designated for preservation by the Engineer shall be carefully protected from damage. The Contractor shall erect such barricades, guards, and enclosures as may be considered necessary for the protection of the trees during all construction operations.

3.6 PRESERVATION OF DEVELOPED PRIVATE PROPERTY

A. The Contractor shall exercise extreme care to avoid unnecessary disturbance of developed private property along the route of the construction. Trees, shrubbery, gardens, lawns, and other landscaping, which in the opinion of the Engineer must be removed, shall be replaced and replanted to restore the construction easement to the condition existing prior to construction.

B. Improvements to the land, such as fences, walls, outbuildings, and other structures which of necessity must be removed, shall be replaced with equal quality materials and workmanship.

C. The Contractor shall clean up the construction site across developed private property directly after construction is completed, upon approval of the Engineer.

3.7 PRESERVATION OF PUBLIC PROPERTY

A. The appropriate paragraphs of Articles 3.5 and 3.6 of these specifications shall apply to the preservation and restoration of public lands, parks, rights-of-way, easements, servitudes, and all other damaged areas.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02211 Additions and Renovations Rough Grading ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 02211 ROUGH GRADING PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1.1.1 Removal of topsoil and subsoil. 1.1.2 Cutting, grading, filling, rough contouring, and compacting the site for site

structures, building pads, and retaining walls.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 1.2.1 Section 01400 - Quality Control: 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Testing

fill compaction. 1.2.2 Section 02110 - Site Clearing. 1.2.3 Section 02205 - Soil Materials.

1.2.4 Section 02207 - Aggregate Materials. 1.2.5 Section 02222 - Excavating: Building excavation. 1.2.6 Section 02223 - Backfilling: General building area backfilling.

1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and

Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 10 lb (4.54 Kg) Rammer and 18 inch (457 mm) Drop.

1.3.2 ASTM D2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

1.3.3 ASTM D3017 - Test Methods for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1 Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C136.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

1.5.1 Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by horizontal dimensions,

elevations or inverts, and slope gradients. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Topsoil: As specified in Section 02205. 2.1.2 Subsoil Fill: As specified in Section 02205. 2.1.3 Structural Fill: As specified in Section 02205 and 02207.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02211 Additions and Renovations Rough Grading ENG-12-061 Page 2

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION 3.1.1 Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. 3.1.2 Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as

indicated.

3.2 PREPARATION

3.2.1 Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. 3.2.2 Stake and flag locations of known utilities. 3.2.3 Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage. 3.2.4 Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities as indicated on Drawings. 3.2.5 Protect above and below grade utilities that remain. 3.2.6 Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, bulkhead, posts

and rails and paving from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

3.3 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION

3.3.1 Excavate subsoil from foundation areas. 3.3.2 Do not excavate wet subsoil or excavate and process wet material to obtain

optimum moisture content. 3.3.3 When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp

axe. 3.3.4 Stockpile in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 8 feet and protect

from erosion. Remove from site, subsoil not being reused. 3.3.5 Benching Slopes: Horizontally bench existing slopes greater than 1:4 to key

placed fill material to slope to provide firm bearing. 3.3.6 Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for

specified fill.

3.4 FILLING

3.4.1 Fill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials. 3.4.2 Place fill material on continuous layers and compact. 3.4.3 Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction

density. 3.4.4 Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted

otherwise. 3.4.5 Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas. 3.4.6 Remove surplus fill materials from site.

3.5 TOLERANCES

3.5.1 Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot from required elevation.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.6.1 Section 01400 - Quality Assurance: Field inspection and testing. 3.6.2 Testing: In accordance with ASTM D1557 and ASTM D2922.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02211 Additions and Renovations Rough Grading ENG-12-061 Page 3

3.6.3 If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest.

3.6.4 Frequency of Tests: Each lift. END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02212 Additions and Renovations Finish Grading ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 02212 FINISH GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 This section includes all grading work required for the construction of the service

connections and lines to water, sewer and gas mains, drain line construction, general site grading to elevations shown on the plans, and walkway construction shown on the Drawings within the project area. Grading operations shall include finish grading and sodding as indicated on the Drawings to provide adequate drainage for the project area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Site shall be graded to meet existing contours on adjacent properties to the construction

site so as to provide positive drainage into proposed catch basins or other drainage structures.

3.02 Finish grading shall include furnishing and placing topsoil, 4 inches thick, using

approved topsoil of appropriate organic matter, inorganic matter (silt, clay, and sand), deleterious material, pH, and mineral and plant nutrients with recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorous, and potash nutrients and any limestone, aluminum sulfate, or other soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil suitable for vegetation growth.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02222 Additions and Renovations Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting-Utilities and Pavement ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 02222 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING- UTILITIES AND PAVEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor and equipment necessary to remove all earth, rock, water, debris and other materials to the extent required for the construction of the improvements shown on the Drawings. Also included is the preparation of the subgrade or subbase for the foundation of the improvements and the backfilling and compaction around the improvements to the lines and grades established on the Drawings.

1.2 EXTENT OF WORK

A. Excavation shall extend to the width and depth shown on the Drawings or as specified, or where not specified, Contractor shall confine his excavation to the least width practicable and shall provide suitable room for installing pipe and appurtenances.

1.3 BEDDING AND BACKFILLING

A. The Contractor shall furnish and place all sheeting, bracing and supports for the installation of the utilities. Contractor shall backfill trenches with pumped river sand or native material, as indicated on the Drawings. The bottom of the excavation shall be firm, dry, and in all respects, acceptable. The Contractor shall be required to deposit bedding material directly on the bottom of the trench immediately after excavation has reached the proper depth and before the bottom of the trench has become softened or disturbed by any cause whatsoever.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SELECT BACKFILL

A. Granular material known locally as “river sand” shall be used as backfill material for all trench and pit excavations within paved areas and shall be free of roots, shells, or any other foreign matter, ASSHTO A-4 material or better.

2.2 CRUSHED LIMESTONE

A. Limestone used as bedding material shall be from a source approved by the LDOTD, and shall conform to the requirements of Sections 1003.03(d) of the Louisiana Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges, latest edition.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02222 Additions and Renovations Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting-Utilities and Pavement ENG-12-061 Page 2

2.3 CRUSHED CONCRETE

A. Crushed concrete used as bedding material shall be from an applicable state DOTD approved stock pile and shall conform to the gradation requirements of Sections 1003.03(d), 1003.04(a), 1003.08(b) of the Louisiana Standard Specification for Roads and Bridges, latest edition.

2.4 NATIVE MATERIAL

A. Good sound earth free from waste, rubbish, objectionable organic matter, large rocks, waste concrete, or other unstable or unsuitable material.

2.5 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC

A. The Contractor shall furnish Mirafi 500x geotextile fabric as manufactured by Mirafi, Inc., or approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation shall be open cuts with vertical sides using sheeting and bracing as required. All sheeting and bracing for excavations shall be in accordance with OSHA regulations.

B. In case the excavation for any pipeline is carried below the required depth as shown in the bedding details due to an error by the Contractor not for the purpose of removing stumps, roots, logs, etc., the Contractor shall fill and compact the bottom of the excavation up to grade with bedding material in a manner acceptable to the Engineer, without additional compensation for the materials, excavation or the backfilling.

C. All material excavated shall be placed so as to minimize interference with public travel and to permit proper access for inspection of the work.

3.2 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS

A. Excavated material shall be stocked without excessive surcharge on the trench bank or obstructing free access to hydrants and valves. Inconvenience to traffic and abutters will not be allowed.

B. All excess excavated material shall be removed from the site of the work by the Contractor and disposed of at a legally approved off-site area at no cost to the Owner.

3.3 OVER-EXCAVATION TO REMOVE STUMPS, ROOTS, LOGS

A. Stumps, roots, and logs which are encountered within the trench area shall be cut to a depth of one (1) foot below the bottom of the trench. The Contractor shall fill this excavated space with compacted bedding material as described in paragraph 3.06.

B. When so required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall probe one (1) foot below the established bottom of the trench. If any stump, roots, logs, etc., are

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02222 Additions and Renovations Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting-Utilities and Pavement ENG-12-061 Page 3

discovered by this probing, the Contractor shall cut them out just as if they had been visible in the trench.

C. Blasting will not be allowed for the removal of stumps. 3.4 TEST PITS

A. Test Pits for the purpose of locating underground utilities or structures in

advance of the construction shall be excavated by the Contractor. Test pits shall be backfilled with compacted river sand immediately after the desired information has been obtained. The backfill material shall be restored and maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and in accordance with the paragraph pertaining to “Backfilling and Bedding”.

3.5 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Proper implements, tools and facilities shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient prosecution of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped into the trenches.

B. All pipe, fittings, and appurtenances shall be inspected for defects and cracks prior to being lowered into the trench.

C. The outside of the spigot, the inside of the bell, and any couplings used shall be brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from all foreign matter before the pipe is joined.

D. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. During the laying operations, no debris, tools, clothing or other material shall be placed in the pipe.

E. After placing a length of pipe in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it as herein specified. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space.

F. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. This provision shall apply during the noon hour as well as overnight. If water is in the trench, the seal shall remain in place until the trench is pumped completely dry.

G. Cutting of pipes for inserting fittings or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with instructions of the pipe manufacturer and without damage to the pipe.

3.6 BACKFILLING AND BEDDING

A. As soon as practicable after the pipe has been laid, jointed, and tested, backfilling shall begin and thereafter be prosecuted expeditiously. Bedding shall conform to the details on the Drawings. When laying pipe, the groove for the pipe and bell hole must be accurately shaped, and the bedding must be closely packed under and around the pipe.

B. Bedding material shall be as shown on the Drawings. The compaction of the bedding shall be as shown on Drawings. The bedding and pipe shall be

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02222 Additions and Renovations Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting-Utilities and Pavement ENG-12-061 Page 4

enclosed in a geotextile fabric such as Mirafi 500X or approved equal. Geotextile fabrics shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. All foundation lumber (i.e. planking, sills, and stringers in the trench bottom) shall be No. 2 Common Southern Pine.

C. The remainder of the trench above the bedding shall be backfilled with river sand at locations where open cutting is permitted across roadways. Native backfill material will be allowed for trenches outside pavement areas.

Sand backfill beneath paved areas where indicated on the Drawings shall be placed in layers up to 12" from the bottom of the pavement base course and thoroughly compacted to 97% of maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698. Maximum lifts will be 6 inches. Under non-paved areas, native backfill material shall be placed in layers not exceeding 8 inches deep and compacted to approximate density of the adjacent material to eliminate voids.

D. Backfill around manholes shall be treated as in paragraph C above. E. Broken paving shall not be placed in backfill.

3.7 RESTORING TRENCH SURFACE

A. Where the trench occurs adjacent to paved streets, in shoulders, sidewalks, or in cross-country areas, the Contractor shall thoroughly compact the backfill and shall maintain the surface as the work progresses. If settlement takes place, he shall immediately deposit additional fill to restore the level of the ground.

B. The surface of any driveway or any other area which is disturbed by the trench excavation and which is not a part of the paved street shall be restored by the Contractor to a condition at least equal to that existing before work began.

C. In sections where the pipeline passes through grassed areas, the Contractor shall regrade and sod all disturbed areas as directed by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02250 Additions and Renovations Minor Demolition ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 02250 MINOR DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section requires the selective removal and subsequent off-site disposal of the following: 1. Removal of items and materials indicated “remove.”

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Remodeling construction work and patching are included within the respective

sections of specifications, including removal of materials for reuse and incorporation into remodeling or new construction.

B. Relocation of pipes, conduits, ducts, and other mechanical and electrical work is specified in other Divisions.

1.3 SCHEDULE

A. Submit schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Owner's Representative for review prior to start of work. Include coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control.

1. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations.

1.4 CONDITION OF STRUCTURES

A. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished.

1. Conditions existing at time of commencement of contract will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work.

1.5 PARTIAL DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL

A. Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed.

1. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.

1.6 PROTECTIONS

A. Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to protect Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02250 Additions and Renovations Minor Demolition ENG-12-061 Page 2

1. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and general public to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations.

4. Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary. 5. Construct temporary insulated solid dustproof partitions where required to

separate areas where noisy or extensive dirt or dust operations are performed. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks if required.

6. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building.

7. Remove protections at completion of work. 1.7 DAMAGES

A. Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work at no cost

to Owner. 1.8 TRAFFIC

A. Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal in a manner to ensure

minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.

1.9 UTILITY SERVICES

A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain. Keep in service and protect against

damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when

authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities.

2. Maintain fire protection services during selective demolition operations. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

A. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.

1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02250 Additions and Renovations Minor Demolition ENG-12-061 Page 3

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be performed. Photograph existing conditions of structure surfaces, equipment, or surrounding properties that could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition work; file with Owner's representative prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.

1. Cease operations and notify Owner's representative immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations.

B. Erect and maintain weatherproof partitions and closures as required to prevent damage to portions of the building.

1. Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work.

C. Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain.

1. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover.

3.3 DEMOLITION A. Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner.

1. Remove ceiling tile and grid first. After removal contractor shall notify Architect. Owner and Architect will inspect existing special systems wiring above ceiling and tag any wiring that shall remain. Contractor shall allow 48 hrs. for this inspection during which time the contractor shall continue demolition at areas not related to any ceiling special systems wiring.

2. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-driven impact tools.

3. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

4. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction.

5. Demolish foundation walls to a depth of not less than 12 inches below existing ground surface. Demolish and remove below-grade wood or metal construction. Break up below-grade concrete slabs.

6. For interior slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw where possible.

7. Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. Provide fill consisting of approved earth, gravel, or sand, and free of trash and debris, stones over 6 inches in diameter, roots, and other organic matter.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02250 Additions and Renovations Minor Demolition ENG-12-061 Page 4

B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of conflict. Submit report to Owner's representative in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without delay.

C. Salvage Items: Where indicated on Drawings as "Salvage - Deliver to Owner," carefully remove indicated items, clean, store, and turn over to Owner and obtain receipt.

D. Disposal of Demolished Materials: Remove debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building site. Transport and legally dispose off site.

1. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution.

2. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site. E. Cleanup and Repair: Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment,

and demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean.

F. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return structures and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to commencement of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02361 Additions and Renovations Termite Control ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 02361 TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies treatment for termite control.

1.2 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for Work, including preparing substrate and application rates.

B. Engage a licensed professional pest control operator to apply treatment solution. C. Use only termiticides that bear a federal registration number of the U.S. Environmental

Protection Agency (EPA). D. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling, and grading

operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations. 1. To ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of soil toxicant manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Treatment Solution: Bait and treat the structure as required. Use solutions formulated

to prevent termite infestation. Provide a working solution of one of following chemical elements in concentrations recommended by termiticide manufacturer. 0. Chloropyrifos:

a. Dursban TC, Dow Chemical Co. 1. Permathrin:

a. Dragnet FT, FMC Corp. b. Torpedo, ICI Americas, Inc.

2. Cypermethrine: a. Prevail FT, FMC Corp. b. Demon, ICI Americas, Inc.

3. Fenvalerate: a. Gold Coast Tribute, Du Pont.

4. Isofenphose: a. Pryfon, Mobay Corp.

B. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if approved for intended application by local governing authorities. Use only treatment solutions that are not harmful.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02361 Additions and Renovations Termite Control ENG-12-061 Page 2

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Termiticide may be applied as recommended by manufacturer.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Application Rates: Apply treatment solution at rates and concentrations recommended by termiticide manufacturer.

B. Post signs in areas of application warning workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction.

C. Reapply termiticide treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent work or other construction activities following application.

3.3 CERTIFICATE

A. Contractor shall furnish certificate of application to Architect within seven (7) days upon completion of application.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02600 Additions and Renovations Concrete Paving ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 02600 CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The General Provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The extent of concrete curbs, walks and paving is shown on the drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than herein specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Forms: Steel, wood or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects. Use flexible spring steel forms or wood boards to form radius bends as required. Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface the surface of the concrete.

B. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185. Furnish in flat sheets or rolls.

C. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 40. D. Dowel Bars: Dowel bars shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A 615,

ASTM A 616, or ASTM A 617, free from burring or other deformation restricting slippage in the concrete. A minimum of two-thirds of the length of each dowel bar shall be painted with one coat of zinc-chromate. If plastic or epoxy-coated steel dowels are used, no zinc-chromate coating is required. Coated dowels shall conform to the requirements given in AASHTO M 254. The sleeves for dowel bars used in expansion joints shall be metal, or an approved design to cover 2 to 3 inches (50 mm to 75 mm) of the dowel, with a closed end and with a suitable stop to hold the end of the bar at least 1 inch (25 mm) from the closed end of the sleeve.

E. Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 03300 for concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials and others as required.

F. Joint Filler: Resilient and non-extruding type pre-molded bituminous impregnated fiberboard units complying with ASTM D 1751 and FS HH-F-341, Type 1.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02600 Additions and Renovations Concrete Paving ENG-12-061 Page 2

G. Sealer: Hot-applied bituminous compound with rubberizing substances; complying with FF-SS-164 for concrete paving joints; with temperature of application as recommended by the manufacturer for the service indicated.

H. Keyed Construction Joint: Standard sheet metal keyway liner, galvanized or of similar rust-resistant material. Sufficiently stiff to support upper keyway flanges. Top edge shall have a removable plastic cap that, when removed after concrete placement, leaves a joint sealant pocket.

I. Expansion and Control Joints: Expansion and control joint locations and detailing shall be as shown in drawings.

J. Curing Materials: One of the following: 1. Liquid membrane-forming compounds for curing concrete shall conform

to the requirements of ASTM C 309, Type 2. 2. White polyethylene film for curing concrete shall conform to the

requirements of ASTM C 171. 3. White burlap-polyethylene sheeting for curing concrete shall conform to

the requirements of ASTM C 171. 4. Waterproof paper for curing concrete shall conform to the requirements

of ASTM C171. K. Pavement Marking: Comply with FS TTP-115 and Section 09900 for traffic zone

marking paint. 1. Painting: All light standard bases, sidewalk risers, wheel stops,

directional arrows and striping to indicate parking areas and traffic lanes shall be painted yellow. Ramps shall also be striped yellow and all edges yellow. Also see drawings for special handicapped striping requirements.

L. Concrete Mix, Design and Testing: 1. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete

mix design, sampling and testing and quality control and as herein specified.

2. Testing for this Section shall be fully coordinated by contractor. 3. Design the mix, to produce standard-weight concrete consisting of

Portland cement, aggregate, air-entraining admixture and water to produce the following properties: a. Compressive Strength: Min. PSI (at 28 days) for paving,

sidewalks, and curbs shall be 4,000 PSI. b. Slump Range: 2" to 4".

c. Air Content: 5% to 8%. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from the compacted sub-base surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION

A. Set forms to the required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of the work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02600 Additions and Renovations Concrete Paving ENG-12-061 Page 3

3.3 REINFORCEMENT

A. Locate, place and support reinforcement as specified in Division 3 sections. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 3 sections for mixing and placing concrete and as herein specified.

B. Do not place concrete

C.

until sub-base and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten sub-base if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. Place concrete

D. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than ½-hour, place a construction joint.

using methods which prevent segregation of the mix. Consolidate concrete along the face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent discoloration of reinforcing, dowels and joint devices.

E. When adjacent pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on the concrete until the pavement has attained sufficient strength to carry the loads without injury.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct expansion, contraction and construction joints true-to-line with face perpendicular to surface of the concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Contraction Joints: Provide contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on the drawings. Form joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. Contraction joints to be used at sidewalks only, continuous through curbs.

C. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at the end of all pours and at locations where placement operations are stopped for a period of more than ½-hour, except where such pours terminate at expansion joints. Construct joints as shown or, if not shown, use standard galvanized metal keyway-section forms at longitudinal joints. All construction joints shall receive continuous sealant.

D. Expansion Joints: Provide pre-molded joint filler for expansion joints abutting building, concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks and other fixed objects, 3/4" wide unless otherwise indicated. Joints shall be continuous through concrete curbs. 1. Extend joint fillers full-width and depth of joint and not less than 1/2" or

more than 1" below finished surface and fill with sealer level with pavement.

2. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02600 Additions and Renovations Concrete Paving ENG-12-061 Page 4

3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth the surface by screeding and floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust the floating to compress the surface and produce a uniform texture.

B. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish.

C. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb and formed joints with an edging tool and round to 1/2" radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate any tool marks on concrete surface.

D. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete surface finishing, as follows: 1. Broom finish

2.

by drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic at sidewalks. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to Engineer.

On inclined slab surfaces

3.

, provide a coarse, non-slip finish by scoring surface with a stiff- bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.

On concrete ramps4.

, provide texture and scoring as shown in drawings. Curbs

5. : Finish smooth with wood float, brush and water.

ScoringE. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form

removal, clean ends of joints and point-up any honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by the Architect.

: Provide scoring pattern as indicated on drawings.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02622 Additions and Renovations Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 02622 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples 1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section of the Specifications defines the product specifications for the PVC gravity sewer and drainage pipe.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All plastic pipe and appurtenances shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who is experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacturer of the items to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval in accordance

with the General Conditions and Section 01300 and shall include dimensioning and technical specification for all piping to be furnished.

B. Submit to the Engineer, for approval, samples of all materials specified herein.

1.5 TOOLS

A. Special tools, solvents, lubricants, and caulking compounds required for normal installation shall be furnished with the pipe.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GRAVITY SEWERS AND DRAINAGE PIPE AND FITTINGS SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. PVC gravity pipe shall be SDR 26 heavy wall meeting the requirements of ASTM

D3034, having a minimum F/Y stiffness of 115 psi as tested in conformance with ASTM D2412, latest edition.

2.2 JOINTS

A. All joints shall consist of an integral bell with a factory installed “locked-in”

elastomeric gasket. The spigot end of each joint shall be factory beveled. Elastomeric gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM D1869 and F-477.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02622 Additions and Renovations Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping ENG-12-061 Page 2

2.3 SETTING MARKS

A. The pipe shall be shipped with one coupling factory applied. Pipe shall have a ring painted around the uncoupled end in such a manner as to allow field checking of setting depth of pipe in the socket. This requirement is made to assist construction superintendents and inspectors in visual inspection of pipe installation. If belled-end pipe is specified, the same ring shall be painted around the male end of the pipe. Pipe shall be integral bell and spigot. Pipe shall have a stop mark on the spigot end to prevent overbelling.

2.4 SHIPPING

A. Pipe must be delivered to job site by means which will adequately support it, and

not subject it to undue stresses. In particular, the load shall be so supported that the bottom rows of pipe are not damaged by crushing. Pipe shall be unloaded carefully and strung or stored as close to the final point of placement as is practical.

2.5 PHYSICAL APPEARANCE

A. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free from cracks, holes, foreign

inclusions or other defects. The pipe shall be as uniform as commercially practical in color.

2.6 WORKMANSHIP

A. The workmanship, pipe dimensions and tolerances outside diameters, wall

thicknesses, eccentricity, sustained pressures, burst pressures, flattening, extrusion quality, marking and all other requirements of Commercial Standards P.S. 22-70 shall be conformed with in all respects.

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02710 Additions and Renovations Storm Drainage System Appurtenances ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 02710 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM APPURTENANCES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall supply and install all drainage appurtenances complete and in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Earthwork 1.3 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality or other requirements of these Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the referenced Standards; provided, that wherever the provisions of said publication are in conflict with the requirements specified herein, the more stringent requirement shall apply. 1. Commercial Standards:

ASTM A48 Specification for Grey Iron Castings. ASTM C923 Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures and Pipes.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for installation of the Work of this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work of this section in strict accordance with applicable requirements of governmental agencies which have jurisdiction, and under the direction of the Engineer.

B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work specified in this Section.

C. Use equipment adequate in size design capacity and numbers to accomplish Work in a timely manner.

D. Installer: A firm specializing in and experienced in similar systems with minimum 5 years documented experience.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Before starting Work, coordinate Work and obtain clearance from utility companies and/or governmental agencies which supply existing or proposed services to project.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02710 Additions and Renovations Storm Drainage System Appurtenances ENG-12-061 Page 2

B. If active utility lines are encountered and are indicated on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor, take necessary steps promptly to assure that service will not be interrupted and notify Engineer immediately.

C. If service is interrupted by Work performed under this Section, immediately restore service by repairing damaged utilities. Payment will be made to the contractor in accordance with the terms of the Contract unless the interruption is due to the Contractor’s negligence.

D. Protection of persons and property: 1. Barricade open depressions and holes which occur in the performance of

this Work. Post warning lights and other necessary warning devices on property adjacent to, or with public access to the Work site.

2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by operations under this Section.

3. Comply with all local, State and Federal safety requirements. E. Protect adjoining work during installation.

1.7 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit drawings of precast concrete manhole sections showing details of reinforcement and joints in accordance with Section 01300.

1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Accurately record location of pipe runs, connections, manholes, cleanouts, and invert elevations.

B. Identify, locate and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT CONNECTORS

A. Resilient connectors may be used to connect pipe to manhole structures when approved by the Engineer. Resilient connectors shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C923.

2.2 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS

A. Manhole frames and covers shall be castings in accordance with ASTM A48. Frames and covers shall be to the size and type, and with lettering embossed on the cover, as shown on the Drawings. Cast iron castings shall be tough, close-grained, and free from blow holes, shrinkage cracks or other defects. Castings shall be smooth, clean and comply with Class 30C of ASTM A48.

B. All covers shall be non-rocking, watertight, and fitted with lift and locking devices. Locking wrenches and lift handles or pry bar holes shall be provided with the frames and covers as shown on the Drawings. One locking wrench shall be provided for every ten manhole frame and cover sets supplied.

C. Catch basin gratings and frames shall be as shown. D. Frame and cover shall be designed to carry AASHTO-H-20 traffic loading.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 02710 Additions and Renovations Storm Drainage System Appurtenances ENG-12-061 Page 3

E. Manhole covers used in conjunction with a storm drainage system shall be marked “DRAIN”.

2.3 MANHOLES

A. Manholes shall be constructed of precast concrete manhole rings as shown and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-478. Precast concrete rings shall be manufactured by a process that will produce a dense, homogeneous concrete ring of first quality. The rings shall have a minimum wall thickness of 4 inches if steel-reinforced and 6 inches if not reinforced. Cement used in manufacturing the rings shall be Type V Portland cement as specified in the “Specification for Portland Cement” (ASTM C150).

Manhole sections shall be provided with ¾ inch diameter galvanized steel steps cast in place, with maximum spacing of 12 inches. Manholes shall be as manufactured by Associated Concrete Products, Costa Mesa, California; Ameron, Monterey Park, California; New Orleans Cement Products, New Orleans, Louisiana or equal. Mortar for bonding joints shall consist of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts of sand, by volume.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MANHOLE FRAME AND COVER

A. Manhole frame shall set with the top conforming to the grade shown on the Drawings. Frames shall be set a full bed of mortar.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 03

CONCRETE

Ascension Counseling Center Section 03200 Additions and Renovations Concrete Reinforcement ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Reinforcing steel bars, welded steel wire fabric for cast-in- place concrete. B. Support chairs, bolsters, bar supports, spacers, and other devices for supporting

reinforcements. 1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Building. B. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete for Reinforcing. C. ANSI/ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. E. CRSI - Manual of Practice F. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. G. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and

Nomenclature. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, and Documents 63 and 65.

B. Conform to ACI 315. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. The contractor shall submit 5 copies of shop drawings to the Architect that he has first thoroughly checked and approved. Copies of approved drawings shall be furnished the job as needed. Two complete sets will be given to the Architect.

B. Detailing shall be performed by experienced detailers. Shop Drawings shall show all necessary details for fabrication and placement in a clear and easily readable manner.

C. Detail reinforcing steel in accordance with ACI-315-74, indicating sizes, spacings, locations and quantities of reinforcing steel, wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, splicing, stirrup spacing, supporting and spacing devices and dowels.

D. Submit mill test certificates of supplied concrete reinforcing, indicating physical and chemical analysis if requested by Architect.

E. If it is apparent to the Architect or Engineer that the contractor has not thoroughly checked the shop drawings before submitting them, the shop drawings will be rejected and they shall be resubmitted after they have been thoroughly checked by the contractor.

F. Only complete sets of shop drawings will be reviewed unless an agreement to check partial submittals is obtained prior to the first submittal. Do not fabricate any material until approval of the Architect has been obtained.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 03200 Additions and Renovations Concrete Reinforcement ENG-12-061 Page 2

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Deliver reinforcing to project site in bundles marked with metal gages indicating contents of bundle keyed to fabrication schedule.

B. Handle and store materials to prevent contamination and deterioration. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, standard specification 60 yield grade billet-steel deformed bars, uncoated finish.

B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ANSI/ASTM A185 plain type; in coiled rolls; uncoated finish.

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Tie Wire: Minimum 18 gage annealed type. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support

of reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete. Where bar supports are to sit on forms which are to be removed, their legs are to have plastic caps, unless approved otherwise by Architect.

C. Other Supports: Concrete bricks may be used in bottom of ground supported grade beams to support reinforcing steel.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate in accordance with ACI 315, providing concrete cover specified in Section 03300 unless shown otherwise on plans.

B. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings at points of minimum stress. Indicate location of splices on shop drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required.

D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverage for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 03200 Additions and Renovations Concrete Reinforcement ENG-12-061 Page 3

E. Do not displace or damage moisture barrier required by Section 03300. F. Wire Fabric:

1. Install in longest practical length. 2. Lap adjoining pieces 1'-0" and tie splices with #16 wire. Offset laps to prevent

continuous laps. 3. Place wire fabric reinforcing in approximate center of slab.

G. Install vertical dowel steel before placing concrete. Provide template to assure proper location and alignment.

H. Refer to Structural Drawings for additional requirements.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 03300 Additions and Renovations Cast-In-Place Concrete ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, con-crete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when character-

istics of materials project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances war-rant adjustments.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." In-clude material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed con-crete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

C. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indi-cated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1. Avoid damaging steel reinforcement when placed on site.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 03300 Additions and Renovations Cast-In-Place Concrete ENG-12-061 Page 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Form Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treat-ments of concrete surfaces.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60B. Deformed –Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.

, deformed.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows:

1. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: Size: 1-1/2 inchesC. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.

.

2.4 CURING MATERIALS – NOT USED

2.5 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be ap-plied, until concrete structure can support such loads.

B. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete sur-faces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 verti-

Ascension Counseling Center Section 03300 Additions and Renovations Cast-In-Place Concrete ENG-12-061 Page 3

cal. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

3.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate

and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and em-bedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Before placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weak-ness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as speci-fied. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

3.4 FINISHING- FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, ar-ranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch

3.5 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

in height.

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 305R.

3.6 JOINT FILLING

A. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 03300 Additions and Renovations Cast-In-Place Concrete ENG-12-061 Page 4

3.7 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's ap-proval.

B. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer/Engineer’s approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

C. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engi-neer/Engineer’s approval.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified independent testing and inspect-ing agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control shall include pile caps, slabs, grade beams, pit walls, pavement, curbs and any other miscellaneous items not speci-fied but integral to the work. Tests shall include compression tests, slump tests

B. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective proce-dures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 04

MASONRY

Ascension Counseling Center Section 04100 Additions and Renovations Masonry Mortar and Grout ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 04100 MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes mortar and grout for masonry.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, 2x2 inch in size illustrating mortar color and color range.

B. Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificates that materials meet or exceed specified requirements.

C. Test Reports: Submit test reports indicating project identification name and number, testing service name, mortar type, mortar mix proportions and materials, design compressive strength at 28 days; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28 day tests.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with MSJC Code (ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402) and MSJC Specification (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602).

B. Do not change source or brands of mortar materials during the course of the work.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Hot and Cold Weather Requirements: MSJC Specification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, normal-Type I; gray color. Provide white cement for colored mortar.

B. Masonry Cement: NOT PERMITTED. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type; clean, dry, protected

against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S or N. E. Grout Course Aggregate: Maximum 3/8” size. F. Grout Fine Aggregate: Sand. G. Water: Clean and potable.

2.2 MIXES

A. Mortar for Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S or Type M. 1. Use mortar type proportioned by volume, with minimum average

compressive strength as follows: (Use no masonry cement)

Ascension Counseling Center Section 04100 Additions and Renovations Masonry Mortar and Grout ENG-12-061 Page 2

a. Above Grade: Type S; 1800 psi. b. Below Grade: Type M; 2500 psi.

B. Grout for Reinforced Masonry: ASTM C476.

2.3 MORTAR COLOR

A. Mortar Color: To Match Existing Building.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXING

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270, 2,500 psi. Masonry cement NOT permitted.

B. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C476, 3,000 psi. Masonry cement NOT permitted.

C. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration.

D. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of mortar or grout. E. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper within two hours of mixing. Do not re-

temper mortar after two hours of mixing.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of Section 04202. B. Sample Mock-Up Panel: Incorporate examples of ALL conditions pertinent to the

project; include bonding patterns, colored mortars, finished joint tooling, back-up construction, expansion joints and control joints (with sealant and backer rod), corners, headers, sills, horizontal reinforcing, anchorage to back-up construction, thru-wall flashing, cavity insulation, weeps and any other special conditions for the project into masonry panel. The purpose of the sample panel is for the Contractor to demonstrate his understanding of all aesthetic and technical criteria related to the masonry work for the Owner and Architect approval prior to initiating actual work on the project. Owner and Architect must approve sample panel prior to start of masonry work. Sample panel shall not be a part of the actual masonry work. Contractor shall maintain and protect approved sample panel for duration of masonry construction. Mockup panel shall be of same units batched for the project.

C. Joint Finish: Tooled slightly concave; sled runners on horizontal joints. D. Colored Mortar: Consistent color is mandatory; freshly installed masonry shall be

protected. E. All brick head and bed joints shall be filled solid; no furrowing allowed.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C780. B. Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 04202 Additions and Renovations Brick Veneer ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 04202 BRICK VENEER

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Facebrick units. B. Reinforcement, anchorage and accessories.

1.2 REFERENCE

A. ACI 530.1-Specifications for Masonry.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Samples: Submit brick units, to illustrate color, texture and color range.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Mason with a minimum of three years documented experience.

1.6 MOCKUP

A. As required under Part 3 Execution. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Provide 50 of each size, color and type of face brick units.

1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BRICK UNITS

A. Face Brick: To Match Existing Building. B. Size and Shape: Modular sized brick units, special shapes as detailed on

Drawings. Provide solid brick units at window sills. C. Manufacturer: To Match Existing Building.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 04202 Additions and Renovations Brick Veneer ENG-12-061 Page 2

D. Color: To Match Existing Building. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Continuous ladder type without moisture drip;

two galvanized 1/8 inch side rods with 1/8 inch cross ties. Provide prefabricated tees and corners at all wall intersections.

B. Veneer Ties at Stud Walls: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. HB#345 at 16" on center each way. Equal products by Wire Bond. 12 ga hot dipped galvanized strap with seat for 9 gauge wire at 16" vertical in veneer wall.

C. Control joints shall have rubber inserts equal to Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. RS series or equal products by Wire-Bond.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Mortar and Grout: As provided for under Section 04100 Masonry Mortar and Grout. 2.4 FLASHINGS

A. Sheet Flashings: Copper paper flashing. Install in widths required, continuous lengths, lap sealed at joints min. 6 inches.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Control Joint Material: Slot Seal shall be equal to Everlastic 2015-3, HB RS Series extruded rubber conforming to ASTM D-2000 2AA-805.

B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinylchloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self-expanding.

C. Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located. B. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance. C. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until

building structure provides permanent bracing. D. Sample Mock-Up Panel: Incorporate examples of ALL conditions pertinent to the

project; include bonding patterns, colored mortars, finished joint tooling, back-up construction, expansion joints and control joints (with sealant and backer rod), corners, headers, sills, horizontal reinforcing, anchorage to back-up construction, thru-wall flashing, cavity insulation, weeps and any other special conditions for the project into masonry panel. The purpose of the sample panel is for the Contractor to demonstrate his understanding of all aesthetic and technical criteria related to the masonry work for the Owner and Architect approval prior to initiating actual work on the project. Owner and Architect must approve sample panel prior to start of masonry work. Sample panel shall not be a part of the actual masonry work. Contractor shall maintain and protect approved sample panel for duration of

Ascension Counseling Center Section 04202 Additions and Renovations Brick Veneer ENG-12-061 Page 3

masonry construction. Mockup panel shall be of same units batched for the project.

3.2 COURSING

A. Place masonry to lines and levels indicated. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform width. Make vertical and horizontal joints

equal and of uniform thickness. C. Layout special shaped areas for arches, indentions, soldier coursing and special

details where shown on drawings. 3.3 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay masonry in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. Buttering corners of joints and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.

B. Fully bond intersections, and external and internal corners. C. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where

adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. D. Remove excess mortar. E. Perform job site cutting with proper tools to provide straight un-chipped edges. Take

care to prevent breaking masonry unit corners or edges. F. Provide masonry control joints as indicated on drawings or described below. G. Follow manufacturers instructions for installation of accent masonry. H. Provide weeps at base of masonry walls and at lintels, install at 24" on center.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Alignment of Columns: Maximum 1/4 inch from true line. B. Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch maximum. C. Variation from Plane of Wall; 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet or more. D. Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or

more. E. Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet; 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch

maximum. F. Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet. G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: Plus or minus 1/4

inch. 3.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES

A. Multiple and single wythe joint reinforcement - Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.

B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend 16 inches each side of opening.

C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Extend 16 inches minimum each

side of opening. E. Place reinforcing bars supported and secured against displacement. Maintain

position within 1/2 inch of true dimension.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 04202 Additions and Renovations Brick Veneer ENG-12-061 Page 4

F. Verify that anchorages embedded in concrete and attached to structural steel members are properly placed. Embed anchorages in every second joint.

G. Wall ties - Weld to structural steel members 16 inches on center vertically. H. Reinforce joint corners and intersections of concrete masonry units as shown on

structural drawings. At a minimum 2 cells in each direction shall be reinforced and filled with concrete.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 04202 Additions and Renovations Brick Veneer ENG-12-061 Page 5

3.6 LINTELS

A. Install loose steel lintels over all new window and door openings and wherever detailed.

3.7 CONTROL JOINTS

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcing across control joints. B. Provide control joints for brick where shown on drawings, or as follows at a minimum

standard: 40 foot maximum spacing across long spans, within two feet of each corner. Verify locations with Architect prior to beginning work.

C. Provide control joints in concrete masonry units where indicated on drawings or at 40 foot maximum spacing. Reinforce and fill 2 cells on each side of control joint. Provide rubber joint as specified at exterior wall locations; utilize sloted masonry units to accommodate rubber joint.

3.8 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, build-in metal door frames, reinforcing, flashings, wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built in the work supplied by other Sections.

B. Build-in items plumb and level. C. Do not build-in organic materials subject to deterioration.

3.9 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes conduit, sleeves, grounds and other items which effect masonry. Cooperate with other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and smears. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with a non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry or

adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 05

METALS

Ascension Counseling Center Section 05500 Additions and Renovations Metal Fabrications ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The work required under this section consists of metal fabrications made of iron and steel shapes, sheets, plates, pipes and castings.

1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Miscellaneous steel that may be required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Ferrous Metals: 1. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will

be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.

2. Steel Plates, Shapes (including angles) and Bars: ASTM A36. 3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; Type and grade (if applicable) as selected by fabricator

and as required for design loading; black finish unless galvanizing is indicated; standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated. This includes painted steel handrails as indicated on Drawings.

4. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A47 or cast steel, ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A153.

B. Grout: 1. Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-

corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section.

C. Fasteners: 1. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into

exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required. 2. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307, Grade A. 3. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561. 4. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. 5. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111. 6. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. 7. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325. 8. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type and style as required. 9. Lock washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 05500 Additions and Renovations Metal Fabrications ENG-12-061 Page 2

D. Paint: 1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer’s or Fabricator’s standard, fast-

curing, lead-free, “universal” primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645.

2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, complying with the Military Specifications MIL-P-21035 (Ships) or SSPC-Paint-20.

E. Galvanizing: Provide a zinc coating for those items indicated or specified to be galvanized, as follows: 1. ASTM A153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM A123 for galvanized rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars

and strip 1/8 inch thick and heavier. 3. ASTM A386 for galvanizing assembled steel products.

F. Shop Painting: 1. Apply shop primer to surfaces of metal fabrications except those which are

galvanized or as indicated to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise indicated, and in compliance with requirements of SSPC-PA1 “Paint Application Specification No. 1” for shop priming.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with

setting template to appropriate sections. 3.3 DESIGN AND FABRICATION

A. Reference Section 10105 for requirements for design of supports for TV brackets. B. Design and anchorage of support for projection screen shall be as required by

screen manufacturer. 3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true

alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized,

except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 05500 Additions and Renovations Metal Fabrications ENG-12-061 Page 3

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum out-of-position: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 06

WOOD AND PLASTIC

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06100 Additions and Renovations Rough Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Framing B. Roof Sheathing C. Preservative Treatment of Wood 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA). B. American Wood Preservers Bureau (AWPB):

1. AWPB LP-2, Standard For Softwood Lumber, Timber, and Plywood Pressure Treated with Water-borne Preservatives for ground contact use.

C. Federal Specifications (FS):

1. FF-B-561C, Bolts, (Screw), Lag. 2. FF-B-575C, Bolts, hexagon and square. 3. FF-B-588C (1), Bolts, Toggle; and Expansive Sleeve, Screw. 4. FF-N-1058 (3), Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples. INT AMD 4. 5. FF-S-111D, Screw, Wood.

D. Product Standards (PS):

1. PS 1-74, Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2. PS 20-70, American Softwood Lumber Standard.

E. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB):

1. Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Grading Rules and Wood Species to be in conformance with PS 20. B. Grading rules of following associations apply to materials furnished under this

section.

1. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 2. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 3. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).

C. Plywood Grading Rules:

1. Softwood Plywood-Construction and Industrial: PS 1. 2. Hardwood Plywood: PS 51.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06100 Additions and Renovations Rough Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 2

D. Grade Marks:

1. Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark.

2. Lumber:

a. Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency certified by Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, mill number of name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.

b. S-GRN: Unseasoned. c. S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content. d. MC-15 or KD: Maximum of 15% moisture content. e. Dense.

3. Softwood Plywood:

a. Conforming to PS 1.

4. Hardwood Plywood: Appropriate grade mark of qualified

inspection, testing, or grading agency. E. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Preservative treated lumber and plywood: American Wood Preservers Bureau, Quality Mark.

2. Pressure treated material: American Wood Preservers Bureau Standards.

3. Span tables: National Forest Products Association. 4. Working Stresses: Softwood Lumber, National Design

Specification, National Forest Products Association. F. Compliance with the pertinent provisions of the Building Code having

jurisdiction. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Immediately upon delivery to job site, place materials in area protected from

weather. B. Store materials a minimum of 6 in. above ground on framework or blocking and

cover with protective waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation or ventilation.

C. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp portions of building. D. Protect sheet materials from corners breaking and damaging surfaces, while

unloading.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06100 Additions and Renovations Rough Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber:

1. Dimensions:

a. Specified lumber dimensions are nominal. b. Actual dimensions to conform to PS 20.

2. Surfacing: Surface four sides (S4S), unless specified otherwise. 3. Framing Lumber:

a. Light framing: plates, blocking, bracing, nailers and

general utility purposes: No. 2 Southern Pine (Unless Noted Otherwise, UNO)

b. Studs: load bearing and non-load bearing. No. 2 Southern Pine (UNO)

c. Structural light framing: floor joists, rafters, ceiling joists, lintels and main framing:

No. 2 Southern Pin (UNO). B. Plywood:

1. Exterior graded plywood where edge or surface is permanently exposed to weather.

2. Roof sheathing: 1/2" C-D, Group 1, Interior APA, Exterior glue. 3. Wall sheathing: 1/2" C-D, Group 1, Interior APA, Exterior glue. 4. Flooring: 3/4" C-D, Group 1, Interior APA, Exterior glue. C. Building Paper. 1. Asphalt-saturated felt: ASTM D226, 15 lb. nonperforated. D. Preservative Treated Wood Products: 1. Water-borne salt preservatives for painted, stained, or exposed

natural wood product: a. AWPB LP-2, above ground application. b. AWPB LP-22, ground contact application. c. Lumber redried to maximum moisture content of 19#

stamped "DRY". E. Rough Hardware: 1. Bolts: FS FF-B-575. 2. Nuts: FS FF-N-836. 3. Expansion shields: FS FF-B-561.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06100 Additions and Renovations Rough Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 4

4. Lag screws and bolts: FS FF-B-561. 5. Toggle bolts: FS FF-B-588. 6. Wood screws: FS FF-S-111. 7. Nails and staples: FS FF-N-105. 8. Metal nailing discs: a. Flat caps, minimum 1 in. (25 mm) diameter. b. Minimum 30 ga. sheet metal. c. Formed to prevent dishing. d. Bell or cup shapes not acceptable. 9. Joist hangers: 18 ga. zinc-coated steel. 10. Metal cross bridging, 16 ga. zinc-coated steel: a. Nailable type with two holes in each end. b. Compression type with prongs at each end. 11. Bar or strap anchors: ASTM A525, zinc-coated steel, 18 ga.

minimum. 12. Ply-clips: Extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces to receive rough carpentry materials are prepared to required

grades and dimensions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Stud Framing: 1. Plates and stud members:

a. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates for load bearing partitions, 2 in. thick by width of studs.

b. Provide single bottom plates and single top plates for non-load bearing partitions, 2 in. thick by width of studs.

c. Provide studs in continuous lengths without splices. d. Toenail studs to bottom plate and end nail to lower top

plate. e. Overlap double top plates minimum of 6 in. at corners and

intersections. f. Face nail upper top plate to lower top plate.

g. Anchor bottom plate of exterior partitions to concrete structure with 1/2"x10" anchor bolts spaces a maximum of 48" o.c.

h. Bottom plate of interior studs may be anchored with power driven studs spaced a maximum of 48" o.c.

i. Triple studs at corners and partition intersections.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06100 Additions and Renovations Rough Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 5

j. Anchor studs abutting masonry or concrete with 1/2" anchor bolts spaced a maximum of 48" o.c.

k. Double studs and headers at all framed openings. l. Space studs at 24" o.c. in load bearing partitions aligning

studs with trusses so that each truss is bearing directly over a stud.

m. Space studs in non-load bearing partitions at 16" o.c. 2. Blocking:

a. Install a continuous horizontal row at mid-height of all partitions.

b. Install continuous blocking behind all horizontal joints in finish wall material.

c. Wedge, align, and anchor blocking with countersunk bolts, washers and nuts, or nails.

d. Locate blocking to facilitate installation of finishing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

B. Miscellaneous Framing: 1. Framing for mechanical and electrical work: a. Frame members for passage of pipes and ducts to avoid

cutting structural members. b. Do not cut, notch, or bore framing members for passage of

pipes or conduits without concurrence of Architect. c. Reinforce framing members where damaged by cutting. C. Roof Sheathing and Flooring: 1. Plywood sheathing: a. Install plywood with face grain perpendicular to supports,

using panel with continuous and joints over two or more spans staggered between panels and locate over supports.

b. Allow minimum space 1/16 in. between end joints and 1/8 in. at end joints for expansion and contraction of panels.

c. Support edge joints by use of plyclips. d. Secure with suitable fasteners 6 in. o.c. along panel edges

and 12 in. o.c. at intermediate supports. D. Wall Sheathing: 1. Plywood Sheathing: a. Install with face grain horizontal or vertical. b. Allow minimum 1/16 in. (1.6mm) space at end joints and

1/8 in. (3.2 mm) at edge joints, doubling these spacings in wet or humid conditions.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06100 Additions and Renovations Rough Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 6

c. Nail 6 in. (152 mm) o.c. along panel edges and 12 in. (305

mm) o.c. at intermediate supports with 6d common nails for panels 1/2 in. (13 mm) thickness and 8d nails for greater thickness.

d. Install at exterior corners only, for corner bracing in lieu of diagonal bracing.

e. Apply one layer of felt over sheathing. E. Pressure-Treated Wood Products: 1. Provide pressure-treated wood for all framing, blocking, furring,

nailing strips built into exterior masonry walls, wood in contact with concrete and in conjunction with gravel stops and built-up roofing.

2. Apply two brush coats of same preservative used in original treatment to all sawed or cut surfaces of treated lumber.

3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect wood decking with protective waterproof covering until roofing has been

installed.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06105 Additions and Renovations Miscellaneous Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL (Not Applicable) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS

A. Lumber, General: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules; factory-mark with grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill; dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Concealed Dimension Lumber: As follows: 1. Species: Any wood species listed by PS 20. 2. Moisture Content: S-DRY, KD 19 or MC 19 (19 percent maximum moisture

content). 3. Grade: No. 2 or standard grade.

C. Exposed Dimension Lumber: As follows: 1. Species: Any one of the following:

a. Southern Yellow Pine. 2. Moisture Content: S-DRY, KD 19 or MC 19 (19 percent maximum moisture

content). 3. Grade: No. 1 or construction grade.

D. Concealed Boards: As follows: 1. Species: Any wood species listed by PS 20. 2. Moisture Content: S-DRY, KD 19 or MC 19 (19 percent maximum moisture

content). 3. Grade: No. 2, 2 Common, or Construction Boards.

E. Exposed Boards: As follows: 1. Species: Any one of the following:

a. Southern Yellow Pine. 2. Moisture Content: S-DRY, KD 19 or MC 19 (19 percent maximum moisture

content). 3. Grade: No. 1, 1 Common, Construction Heart, or Select Merchantable Boards.

F. Miscellaneous Concealed Plywood: PS 1, C-C Plugged Exterior, thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch nominal.

G. Electrical/Telephone Backing Panels: APA-RATED SHEATHING, Exposure 1, fire-retardant treated, thickness as indicated but not less than 15/32 inch.

H. Wall Sheathing: Particleboard, ANSI A 208.1, Grade 2-M-1. I. Subflooring: Particleboard, ANSI A 208.1, Grade 2-M-W (waferboard). J. Fasteners: Where miscellaneous carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground

contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating or of stainless steel.

K. Preservative Treatment: Obtain preservative-treated lumber complying with AWPA Standard C2. Mark each treated item with AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements. Coat surfaces cut after treatment to comply with AWPA M4. 1. Above-Ground Wood Treatment: Pressure treat with waterborne preservatives

to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf. Treat wood items indicated and in contact with roofing, flashing, waterproofing, masonry, concrete, and within 18 inches

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06105 Additions and Renovations Miscellaneous Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 2

of grade. Kiln-dry interior dimension lumber and construction panels after treatment to 19 and 15 percent maximum moisture content, respectively.

2. Ground-Contact Wood Treatment: Pressure treat with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WOOD FRAMING

A. Cut and fit miscellaneous carpentry accurately and securely fasten. Install members plumb and true to line and level.

B. Countersink nail and bolt heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. C. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where

required for screeding or attachment of other work. D. Furring to Receive Gypsum Drywall: Install 1-by-2-inch furring at 16 inches o.c.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06200 Additions and Renovations Finish Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior running trim. 2. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 3. Plastic-laminate countertops. 4. Solid-surfacing-material countertops. 5. Shop finishing of interior woodwork. 6. Tackable surfaces B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel framing and supports for countertops. 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large- scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets and other items installed in architectural woodwork. 4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 2. Thermoset decorative-panels, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on 1 edge.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06200 Additions and Renovations Finish Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 2

3. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square. 7. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 4. Sample ring or sample box of full selection of colors ranges for 3mm PVC edge banding. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers, wood doors with face veneers that are sequence matched with woodwork, transparent-finished wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork and wood veneered paneling that is required to be of the same species as woodwork. D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. E. Mockups: Before releasing interior architectural woodwork, construct mockups for the following conditions:

1. In one unit, attached to wall, provide (1) typical plastic laminate upper cabinet unit and (1) typical plastic laminate counter top with base drawer and cabinet unit. Mockup to be working model with all hardware as specified.

2. Provide additional millwork mockups as indicated on drawings

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06200 Additions and Renovations Finish Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 3

without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine.

C. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. D. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.

1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semiexposed edges.

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Formica Corporation. b. Lamin-Art, Inc. c. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. F. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Du Pont de Nemours and Company. 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)." B. Frameless Concealed Self Closing Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 120 degrees of opening. Approved manufacturers: Blum, Grass, Mepla or Salcie C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid stainless steel metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06200 Additions and Renovations Finish Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 4

D. Shelf Rests: 5 mil metal pin style; clear finish. E. Door Locks: Magnetic touch latch unless otherwise indicated on drawings. F. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel KV 516. G. Drawer Slides: KV 8400 Accuride 3/4" extension types 3832 series 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; 3/4 extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. 2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide. 75 lb rated. Approved Manufacturer: Blum H. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel J. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

K. Tackable Surfaces: All tackable surfaces called out on interior elevations and floor plans to be Forbo bulletin board Color #2186 (Forbo Flooring Systems, 800-542-7839. www.forboflooringNA.com. Install per manufacturer's specifications. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. D. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 1. Use silicone-type for solid surface materials. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch. D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Shop-assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06200 Additions and Renovations Finish Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 5

Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. F. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

G. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. 2.5 INTERIOR RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent- finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. B. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. C. For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width or thickness. D. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2.6 INTERIOR RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Wood Species: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine. B. Profiles: 1. 1-inch thick by 4 inches rabbeted to accept drywall as indicated on the Drawings. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2.7 FLUSH WOOD PANELING A. Grade: Custom. B. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book match. C. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Center-balance match. D. Panel-Matching Method: Match panels within each separate area by the following method: 1. Blueprint-matched panels and components.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06200 Additions and Renovations Finish Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 6

2.8 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS A. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. B. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS/GP-50. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP/PF-42. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS 4. Edges (including countertops): 3 mm PVC matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish as manufactured by Canplast Inc. (800)-599-4455 or approved equal. Provide architect with full range of edge banding color selections for review and selection. C. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: 3mm PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. Provide architect with full range of edge banding color selections for review and selection. b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade CLS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. 4. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hard board above

compartments and drawers except where located directly under tops. D. Shelving: Provide adjustable shelf multiple holes, min 5 mil with 5mil metal pin style; clear finish. E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces as follows: 1. As indicated on Drawings 2.10 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGP/PF-42 for post-formed surfaces; HGS/GP-50 for non-post-formed surfaces, 3mm edge-banding on edge faces. B. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces as follows: 1. As indicated on Drawings C. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. D. Edge Treatment: As indicated. E. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood. F. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.11 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS A. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2" inch for horizontal and vertical surfaces B. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid-surfacing material scheduled as follows: 1. As indicated on Drawings

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06200 Additions and Renovations Finish Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 7

C. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing- material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application. 2. Fabricate turn-down with ½-inch material, double stacked edge. D. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop. E. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop. F. Refer to interior elevations for edges to receive radius thermaformed edges. 2.12 SHOP FINISHING OF WOODWORK A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. B. Items for Shop Finishing: Cabinets and pre-finished interior running trim. C. General: Shop finish transparent-finished interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for finishing opaque-finished architectural woodwork. D. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. E. Transparent Finish: 1. AWI Finish System: TR-4 System conversion varnish. 2. Wood Filler: On items to receive transparent finish, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and that is recommended for applied finishes. 3. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 4. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 06200 Additions and Renovations Finish Carpentry ENG-12-061 Page 8

F. Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.

1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished.

2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 3. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 07

THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07120 Additions and Renovations Fluid Applied Waterproofing ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 07120 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fluid applied emulsion of liquid containing isobutyltrialkoxy silane in alcohol as water repellent on masonry.

.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 04202 - Brick Veneer.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Federal Testing Standards 141. B. ASTM D412 - Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic

Elastomers - Tension. C. Federal Specification SS-W-110C (GSA-FSS). D. ASTM E96 - Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. E. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Waterproofing Manual. F. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION G. Waterproofing System: Spray applied fluid material to prevent moisture migration

to interior. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. Product Data: Provide data for surface primer, flexible flashings, joint cover sheet,

and joint and crack sealants, with temperature range for application of waterproofing membrane.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter

conditions requiring special attention. 1.6 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Procedures for submittals. B. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed

in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Waterproofing Manual. B. Waterproofing Material Manufacturer: Company specializing in waterproofing

membrane with three years experience.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07120 Additions and Renovations Fluid Applied Waterproofing ENG-12-061 Page 2

C. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.8 MOCKUP

A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Requirements for mockup. B. Construct mockup 300 sq ft

Locate where directed.

waterproofed panel; to represent finished work including internal and external corners, jointing. Demonstrate equipment to be used, method of application, and resultant appearance for Architect’s approval. Schedule and test mockup for moisture penetration failure according to manufacturer’s recommendations seven (7) days after application with Architect and product manufacturer’s representative present.

Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F

for 24 hours before and during application and until liquid or mastic accessories have cured.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial

Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist

penetration of water, except where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking of concrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure.

D. For warranty repair work, remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Chemtrete BSM 40 VOC Manufactured by Sivento Inc. 65 Challenger Road Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660 1(800) 828-0919

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MEMBRANE COMPOUND MATERIAL

A. High performance clear, colorless, liquid containing isobutyltrialkoxy silane in alcohol as water repellent on masonry.

Characteristics:

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07120 Additions and Renovations Fluid Applied Waterproofing ENG-12-061 Page 3

Properties

Flash Point 54 degrees F Solvent Denatured ethyl alcohol Color Water white Active Substance isobutyltrialkoxy silane Active Content >40% by weight Density 7.0 lbs/gal VOC 600 g/l max

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify substrate surfaces are free of frozen matter, dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits, projections, penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system.

C. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth, free of honeycomb or pitting, and not detrimental to full contact bond of waterproofing materials.

D. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer or applicator. D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant materials using depth to width ratio as

recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION

A. Protect all adjacent surfaces from chemical reaction or discoloration from waterproofing material.

B. Apply one coat of waterproofing material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions until surface is thoroughly and totally saturated. Maintain a 6 to 8 inch rundown below spray pattern during application. Apply material by manufacturer’s recommended means at 90 degree angles to the wall surface, from the bottom up, ensuring full penetration and coverage at all mortar joints. Coverage rate on brick veneer should meet 1 gallon per 100 square feet of surface area.

C. Applicator must be approved by Manufacturer. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Field inspection, the Manufacturer shall employ and make present, a factory qualified inspector to monitor the application of the waterproofing material.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07120 Additions and Renovations Fluid Applied Waterproofing ENG-12-061 Page 4

B. On completion of membrane installation, spray installation area as directed by Architect, with a pressurized water spray to test saturation.

C. If leaking or saturation is found, allow to dry, patch leaking areas with new waterproofing materials as directed by Architect; repeat saturation test. Repair damage to building.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Protecting installed work. 3.6 SCHEDULE

A. All exposed exterior brick veneer surfaces. END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07160 Additions and Renovations Damp-Proofing ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 07160 DAMP-PROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 11 EXTENT

A. Apply damp-proofing material to exterior face of sheathing, exterior face of concrete masonry at concrete masonry and brick, aluminum clad or plaster walls. Apply as directed by manufacturer to achieve a water tight system. Apply to exterior surface of exterior sheathing where applicable.

B. Damp-proofing coating shall be continuous and unbroken and form in all cases a positive barrier between the inside of the building and all exterior surfaces. Provide taping of sheathing joints with compatible tape - reinforcing tape to receive damp-proofing.

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Subcontract mastic damp-proofing to applicator specializing or having experience in type of damp-proofing specified, who is approved by manufacturer of materials specified, and has completed similar installations in the general area of the Project.

B. Examine areas before installation. Do not proceed

if sheathing joints are not taped or have voids.

1.3 PROTECTION

A. Handle damp-proofing items to avoid damage to materials or to work in place. Satisfactorily repair or remove and replace work that has been damaged.

B. Protect all adjacent surfaces which are not to receive damp-proofing materials from stain, soiling and damage.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver packaged materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers.

B. Arrange deliveries to provide sufficient quantities to permit continuity of any phase of work.

C. Store and handle damp-proofing items to prevent damage to materials or work in place.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warranty this work for a period of two years. Make repairs to the damp-proofing if any leakage occurs due to faulty workmanship or materials.

B. Deliver damp-proofing warranty to Owner upon completion of Work.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07160 Additions and Renovations Damp-Proofing ENG-12-061 Page 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Conform to Federal Specification ASTM D-1227 (Non-Asbestos) The following manufacturers are approved: 1. Sonneborn: 600 2. Karnak equal 3. Substitutions: Instruction to Bidders and Section 01600 - Materials and

Equipment. B. Confirm compatibility with exterior sheathing where applicable.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07160 Additions and Renovations Damp-Proofing ENG-12-061 Page 3

PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces that are to receive damp-proofing. Report unsatisfactory conditions.

B. Do not start damp-proofing work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Proceeding with installation of damp-proofing will be construed as evidence of

acceptance of conditions under which moisture-proofing work will be done. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Substrate shall be clean of foreign matter. Remove loose materials, moisture, grease, and projections. Surfaces shall be completely dry before applying damp-proofing materials.

B. Fill around pipes, anchors, and other items that could penetrate damp-proofing. C. Repair defective work and damaged surfaces before beginning damp-proofing work. D. Do not start application of damp-proofing until receiving surfaces have been

approved. 3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply two coats. Install under strict accordance of manufacturer's recommendations. Apply each coat to a minimum rate of 1.5 gallons per 100 sq.ft. or 15 mil thickness.

B. Apply damp-proofing coating to extent shown on Drawings and specified and in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.4 CUTTING AND REPAIRING

A. Do not cut or puncture installed damp-proofing without specific prior approval. B. Cutting, when approved, shall be done by trade that installed original damp-proofing. C. Remove damaged or defective damp-proofing to expose original surface. Reapply as

specified for the original work. D. Remove and reapply damaged or defective damp-proofing as necessary to provide a

completely watertight condition. END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07190 Additions and Renovations Vapor Retarder ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 07190 VAPOR RETARDER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK REQUIRED

A. Provide specified or approved moisture-vapor retarder under all enclosed slabs on grade, or as shown elsewhere on drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit six complete sets of product data, for proposed installation. B. Indicate manufacturers name and model numbers, for all products and accessories to

be used. Include manufacturers installation instructions and details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A Stego Wrap, Stego Industries LLC, San Juan Capistrano, CA B W.R. Meadows, pre-moulded membrane with plasmatic core. C Alumiseal, Zero-Perm. D Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and

Instructions to Bidders. 2.2 MATERIALS

A. General description: Polyolefin geomembrane sheeting, 15 mils thick, perm rating not less than 0.01 or less.

B. Standards: ASTM E 1745 water vapor barrier, Class A . C. Vapor Permeance Rating determined by ASTM E 96, Procedure E: 0.01 perms or

lower. 2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Seam tape. Tape must meet ASTM E96, water vapor transmission rate of 0.3 perms or lower.

B Vapor proof mastic. Mastic to meet ASTM E96, transmission rate 0.3 perms or lower. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Place membrane after installation of utilities underslabs, and after fill and back fill underslabs have been placed and compacted. Apply membrane with width parallel to direction of concrete pour.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07190 Additions and Renovations Vapor Retarder ENG-12-061 Page 2

B. Lap all joints 6 inch. Use lap control stripes printed on material as guide. Tape all joints.

C. Lap vapor retarder over footings and seal to foundation. D. Tape membrane tightly around pipes, drain lines and conduits which penetrate slabs

to form an effective seal against ground moisture. Contractor may use vapor proof mastic as an alternate around penetrating pipes and conduits.

E. Following placement of steel reinforcement and accessories, check membrane for punctures and tears. Repair all punctures and tears by placing additional cut-to-size membrane sheets over same to provide no less than 6 inch lap. Tape patch joints all 4 sides with tape.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07210 Additions and Renovations Building Insulation ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglass batts. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Extent of insulation work is shown on drawings and indicated by this section.

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation adhesives in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C665, preformed glass fiber batt, faced, friction fit. 1. Manufacturer’s:

Owens Corning Celotex

2. Sizes: 6 inch thick, 9 inch thick, or sizes as indicated on drawings. 2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Mesh reinforced. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. 3.2 INSTALLATION-BATT INSULATION

A. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer’s instructions. B. Install in interior walls for sound attenuation. C. Fit insulation tight in spaces. Leave no gaps or voids.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07250 Additions and Renovations Weather Barriers ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 07250 WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Weather barrier membrane B. Seam Tape C. Flashing D. Fasteners

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International 1. ASTM C920; Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM C1193; Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 3. ASTM D882; Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting 4. ASTM D1117; Standard Guide for Evaluating Non-woven Fabrics 5. ASTM E84; Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 6. ASTM E96; Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 7. ASTM E1677; Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building

Walls 8. ASTM E2178; Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 9. ASTM E2357; Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier

Assemblies B. AATCC – American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists

1. Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test C. TAPPI

1. Test Method T-410; Grams of Paper and Paperboard (Weight per Unit Area) 2. Test Method T-460; Air Resistance (Gurley Hill Method)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each component. B. Quality Assurance Submittals

1. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements.

2. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer’s Field Service Reports: Provide site reports from authorized field

service representative, indicating observation of weather barrier assembly installation.

E. Closeout Submittals 1. Weather Barrier Warranty: Manufacturer’s executed warranty form with authorized

signatures and endorsements indicating date of Substantial Completion. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications 1. Installer shall have experience with installation of commercial weather barrier

assemblies under similar conditions.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07250 Additions and Renovations Weather Barriers ENG-12-061 Page 2

2. Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations.

3. Source Limitations: Provide commercial weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer.

B. Mock-up 1. Install mock-up using approved weather barrier assembly including fasteners,

flashing, tape and related accessories per manufacturer’s current printed instructions and recommendations. a. Mock-up size: 10 feet by 10 feet. b. Mock-up Substrate: Match wall assembly construction, including window

opening. c. Mock-up may remain as part of the work.

2. Contact manufacturer’s designated representative prior to weather barrier assembly installation, to perform required mock-up visual inspection and analysis as required for warranty.

C. Pre-installation Meeting 1. Hold a pre-installation conference, two weeks prior to start of weather barrier

installation. Attendees shall include Contractor, Architect, Engineer, Installer, Owner’s Representative, and Weather Barrier Manufacturer’s Designated Representative.

3. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of weather barrier assembly materials and components, installer’s training requirements, equipment, facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

B. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier assembly with installation of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier assembly.

B. Schedule installation of weather barrier materials and exterior cladding within nine months of weather barrier assembly installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty 1. Special weather-barrier manufacturer’s warranty for weather barrier for a period of ten

(10) years from date of purchase. 2. Pre-installation meetings and jobsite observations by weather barrier manufacturer

for warranty are required.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07250 Additions and Renovations Weather Barriers ENG-12-061 Page 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. DuPont B. Prior Approved Equal

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Basis of Design: DuPont™ Tyvek® CommercialWrap® and related assembly components.

B. Performance Characteristics:

1. Air Penetration: 0.001 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. Type I per ASTM E1677. ≤0.04 cfm/ft2

2. Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Method B.

at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2357

3. Water Penetration Resistance: 280 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127.

4. Basis Weight: 2.7 oz/yd2

5. Air Resistance: Air infiltration at >1500 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460.

, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410.

6. Tensile Strength: 38/35 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, Method A.

7. Tear Resistance: 12/10 lbs., when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E

84. Flame Spread: 10, Smoke Developed: 10. 2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Seam Tape: 3 inch wide tape for commercial applications. B. Fasteners:

1. 1-5/8 inch rust resistant screw with 2-inch diameter plastic cap or manufacturer approved 1-1/4” or 2” metal gasketed washer

C. Sealants: As required by manufacturer D. Flashing: As required by manufacturer

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories.

3.2 INSTALLATION – WEATHER BARRIER

A. Install weather barrier over exterior face of exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

B. Install weather barrier prior to installation of windows and doors. C. Start weather barrier installation at a building corner, leaving 6-12 inches of weather

barrier extended beyond corner to overlap. D. Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07250 Additions and Renovations Weather Barriers ENG-12-061 Page 4

surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level.

E. Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

F. Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings. G. Overlap weather barrier

1. Exterior corners: minimum 12 inches. 2. Seams: minimum 6 inches.

H. Weather Barrier Attachment: 1. Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using weather

barrier manufacturer recommended fasteners, space 12 -18 inches vertically on center along stud line, and 24 inch on center, maximum horizontally.

3.3 SEAMING

A. Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams.

B. Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 3.4 OPENING PREPARATION (for use with non-flanged windows – all cladding types)

A. Flush cut weather barrier at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening. B. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8

inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape.

3.5 FLASHING (for use with non-flanged windows – all cladding types)

A. Flash according to manufacturer’s written recommendations including all flashings, tapes and sealants.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Notify manufacturer’s designated representative to obtain required periodic observations of weather barrier assembly installation.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed weather barrier from damage.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07311 Additions and Renovations Asphalt Shingle Roofing System ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLE ROOFING SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Granule surfaced asphalt shingle roofing. B. Moisture shedding underlayment, eaves, valley and ridge protection. C. Associated metal flashing.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Plywood Roof Sheathing. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

C. ASTM B 370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.

D. ASTM D 225 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles (Organic Felt) Surfaced with Mineral Granules.

E. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.

F. ASTM D 1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.

G. ASTM D 3018 - Standard Specification for Class A Shingles Surfaced with Mineral Granules.

H. ASTM D 3161 - Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Asphalt Shingles (Fan-Induced Method).

I. ASTM D 3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made from Glass Felt and Surfaced with Mineral Granules.

J. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free. K. ASTM D 4869 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Shingle

Underlayment Used in Roofing. L. ASTM D 6757 – Standard Specification for Inorganic Underlayment for Use with

Steep Slope Roofing Products. M. ASTM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's printed product information indicating

material characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide published instructions that indicate

preparation required and installation procedures.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07311 Additions and Renovations Asphalt Shingle Roofing System ENG-12-061 Page 2

D. Certificate of Compliance: Provide Certificate of Compliance from an independent

laboratory indicating that the asphalt fiber glass shingles made in normal production meet or exceed the requirements of the following: 1. ASTM E 108/UL 790 Class A Fire Resistance. 2. ASTM D 3161 Class F / UL 997 Wind Resistance. 3. ASTM D 3462.

E. Shop Drawings: Indicate specially configured metal flashing, jointing methods and locations, fastening methods and locations, and installation details, as required by project conditions indicated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Maintain one copy of manufacturer's application instructions on project site. B. Verify that manufacturer's label contains reference to specified ASTM standards.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Take special care when applying WinterGuard Shingle Underlayment and shingles when ambient or wind chill temperature is below 45 degrees F (7 degrees C). Tack WinterGuard in place if it does not adhere immediately to the deck.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish under provisions of section 01700. B. Provide 50 square feet of extra shingles of each color specified.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish shingle manufacturer's warranty for product(s) of this section as follows:

ASPHALT FIBER GLASS SHINGLES 1. CertainTeed Grand Manor AR: Lifetime limited warranty.

B. Warranty Supplement: Provide manufacturer's supplemental ("CertainTeed SureStart" or “SureStart Plus”) warranty to cover labor and materials in the event of a material defect for the following period after completion of application of shingles: 1. First ten years

C. Extended Warranty Protection (can only be offered by a CertainTeed credentialed contractor): Provide SureStart PLUS protection as follows:

1. 4STAR Coverage (12 years): material and labor costs for repair or replacement and tear off protection.

2. 5STAR Coverage (12 years): material and labor costs for repair or replacement, tear off protection, disposal costs and workmanship defects.

D. Warranty Transferability Clause: Make available to Owner shingle manufacturer's standard option for transferring warranty to a new owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. CertainTeed Corporation.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07311 Additions and Renovations Asphalt Shingle Roofing System ENG-12-061 Page 3

B. Atlas C. Tamko D. Approved Equals.

2.2 ASPHALT FIBER GLASS SHINGLES

A. CertainTeed XT 25 or Equal. 1. Weight: 205 pounds per square (100 square feet) (20.7 kg/sq m). 2. Color: To Match Existing Building.

2.3 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Underlayment: ASTM D 4869, self-adhered shingle underlayment.

2.4 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Sheet Flashing: ASTM A 361/A 361M; 26 gage (0.45 mm) steel with minimum G115/Z350 galvanized coating.

B. Sheet Flashing: ASTM B 209; 0.025 inch (0.63 mm) thick aluminum, mill finish. C. Sheet Flashing: ASTM B 370; cold rolled copper; 16 ounces per square foot (0.55

mm); natural finish. D. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color. E. Tinner’s Paint: Color as selected by Architect to coordinate with shingle color.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Nails: Standard round wire type roofing nails, corrosion resistant; hot dipped zinc coated steel, aluminum, or chromated steel; minimum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) head diameter; minimum 11 or 12 gage (2.5 mm) shank diameter; shank to be of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid wood, plywood, or non-veneer wood decking.

B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I or II. 2.6 FLASHING FABRICATION

A. Form flashing to profiles indicated on Drawings, and to protect roofing materials from physical damage and shed water.

B. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing site conditions under provisions of Section 01700. B. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck

surface. C. Verify roof openings are correctly framed prior to installing work of this section. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of ridges, warps, or voids.

3.2 ROOF DECK PREPARATION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07311 Additions and Renovations Asphalt Shingle Roofing System ENG-12-061 Page 4

A. Follow shingle manufacturer's recommendations for acceptable roof deck materials. B. Broom clean deck surfaces under eave protection and underlayment prior to their

application. 3.3 INSTALLATION - PROTECTIVE UNDERLAYMENT

A. Roof Slope 4:12 or Greater: Install one layer asphalt felt shingle underlayment

perpendicular to slope of roof and lap minimum 4 inches (100 mm) over eave protection.

B. Weather-lap and seal watertight with asphalt roofing cement items projecting through or mounted on roof. Avoid contact of solvent-based cements with WinterGuard.

3.4 INSTALLATION - VALLEY PROTECTION

A. For "open" valleys, first place one ply of WinterGuard, minimum 36 inches (910 mm) wide, centered over valleys. Lap joints minimum 6 inches (152 mm). Follow instructions of shingle and waterproofing membrane manufacturer.

3.5 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING

A. Weather-lap joints minimum 2 inches (50 mm). B. Seal work projecting through or mounted on roofing with asphalt roofing cement

and make weather-tight. 3.6 INSTALLATION - ASPHALT SHINGLES

A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for product type and application specified.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.

B. Visual inspection of the Work will be provided by Owner. If conditions are unacceptable, Owner will notify the Architect.

3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07631 Additions and Renovations Flashing and Sheet Metal Gutters ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 07631 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL GUTTERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards 1. As noted for individual items. 2. ASTM Standards. 3. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Details. B. Samples: 1. For finish, color and color range selection. C. Contract closeout information:

1. Warranty, finish. 2. Warranty, installation.

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work with existing roofing and soffit and fascia installation. B. Provide components necessary to create watertight junctures between roofing,

soffit and fascia and sheet metal work. 1.4 WARRANTY

A. Furnish 20 year warranty on clad sheet metal finish. B. Furnish 10 year warranty on sheet metal work, signed jointly by Contractor and

sheet metal installer. C. Agree to repair or replace work which leaks water, deteriorates excessively or

otherwise fails to perform as water tight flashing. D. Repair finish of clad sheet metal which fades or is damaged.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturer’s 1. Sheet Metal, clad: a. Vincent Metals. b. Petersen Aluminum. c. Approved equal. B. Exposed sheet metal: 1. Clad steel, galvanized G90. a. Smooth. b. Minimum 24 GA.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07631 Additions and Renovations Flashing and Sheet Metal Gutters ENG-12-061 Page 2

2. ASTM-A653/A653M. 3. Coated on each face with 1 mil fluorocarbon coating, 70 percent

Kynar/Hylar. C. Concealed sheet metal: 1. Stainless steel, ASTM-A167 or ASTM-A176. 2. Minimum 24 GA, soft annealed. D. Fasteners: Same material as sheet metal or non-ferrous fasteners which will not

rust, corrode or react. E. Retainers: 16 GA galvanized steel or stainless steel. F. Solder: 1. ASTM-B32 as applicable to materials joined. a. Stainless steel: 50/50 solder with stainless steel type flux. 2. Neutralize flux after soldering. G. Dissimilar metal and cementitious materials protection: 1. Alkali resistant bituminous paint. 2. Tnemec Tneme Tar 46-413. 3. Approved equal. H. Sealants: See Section 07900. 2.2 FABRICATION-SHEET METAL

A. Fabricate true and sharp to profiles and sizes indicated. B. Shop fabricate items to maximum extent possible.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Verify suitability of substrates to accept work. 1. Verify continuous wood blocking sloped 1:12 and covered with one layer of building paper. B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION-SHEET METAL A. Provide items to be built into other construction to Contractor in time to allow their installation. B. If such items are not provided in time for installation, sheet metal fabricator cut in and install. C. Fabricate and install in accordance with details and recommendations of SMACNA. 1. Provide clad sheet metal assemblies where exposed. 2. Provide stainless steel flashing where concealed. D. Set shop fabricated clad sheet metal interior and exterior preformed corners and intersections. E. Set shop fabricated and welded stainless steel interior and exterior preformed corners and intersections. 1. Do not joint at corners. 2. Furnish factory formed corners. F. Solder stainless steel flashing to achieve weathertight joints and required details; do not solder slip joints.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07631 Additions and Renovations Flashing and Sheet Metal Gutters ENG-12-061 Page 3

G. Fasten materials at recommended intervals. H. Provide slip joints to allow for thermal movement. 1. Provide slip joint in conjunction with splices and corners. I. Caulk joints with 2 beads of sealant on each overlap: See Section 07900. J. Turn down cap flashing over base flashings 4 inches and caulk. K. Form flashings to provide spring action with exposed edges hemmed or folded to create tight junctures. L. Provide dissimilar metals and materials protection where dissimilar metals come in contact, or where sheet metal contacts mortar or concrete. M. Provide miscellaneous sheet metal items not specifically covered elsewhere, as indicated or required to provide a weathertight installation. N. Provide continuous retainers. 3.3 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of work, repair damaged areas. B. Clean stains and debris. C. Remove protective coverings.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07840 Additions and Renovations Firestopping ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES

1. Through penetration firestops and smoke-stops for all fire-rated bearing and non-bearing wall and floor assemblies, both blank (empty) and those accommodating penetrating items such as cables, conduits, pipes, ducts, etc.

2. Membrane penetration protection for fire-rated walls. 3. Architectural/Construction joint firestops within walls, floors, or the

intersection of floors to exterior walls, or the intersection of top of walls to ceilings.

4. Top of wall firestopping in all fire-rated partitions 5. Top of wall and construction joint smoke-stopping in all smoke partitions

B. RELATED SECTIONS Proper execution of this work will maintain the hourly ratings of the walls and

floors and ensure progress of work in other Sections. Coordinate work of this Section with the work of the following Sections:

1. Section 04202 Brick Veneer 2. Section 07900 Joint Sealers 3. Section 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 4. Section 15010 Basic Materials & Methods 5. Section 15040 Fire Protection System 6. Section 16010 Basic Materials & Methods

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society For Testing and Materials Standards (ASTM):

1. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method For Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

2. ASTM E814: Standard Test method For Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops

B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2. UL 1479 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops C. UL Fire Resistance Directory:

1. Through Penetration Firestop Devices (XHJI) 2. Fire Resistive Ratings (BXUV) 3. Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) 4. Fill, Void, or Cavity Material (XHHW)

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FIRESTOPPING: The use of a material or combination of materials in a fire-rated structure (wall or floor) where it has been breached, so as to restore the integrity of the fire rating on that wall or floor.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07840 Additions and Renovations Firestopping ENG-12-061 Page 2

B. SYSTEM: The use of a specific firestop material or combination of materials in

conjunction with a specific wall or floor construction type and a specific penetrant(s), constitutes a "System"

C. BARRIER: Any bearing or non-bearing wall or floor that has an hourly fire and smoke rating.

D. THROUGH-PENETRATION: Any penetration of a fire-rated wall or floor that completely breaches the barrier.

E. MEMBRANE-PENETRATION: Any penetration in a fire-rated wall that breaches only one side of the barrier.

F. CONSTRUCTION GAPS: Any gap, joint, or opening, whether static or dynamic, where the top of a wall may meet a floor; wall to wall applications; edge to edge floor configurations; floor to exterior wall; or any linear breach in a rated barrier.

Where movement is required, the firestopping system must comply with UL2079 for dynamic joints.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer’s product literature for each type of firestop material to be installed. Literature shall indicate product characteristics, typical uses, performance and limitation criteria, and test data. Submittal should be in compliance with Section 01300.

B. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit MSDS for each firestop product. C. UL Tested Systems: Submit drawings showing typical installation details for the

methods of installation. Indicate which firestop materials will be used and thickness for different hourly ratings.

D. Engineering Judgments: Submit manufacturer's drawings for all non-standard applications where no UL tested system exists. All drawings must indicate the "Tested" UL system upon which the judgment is based so as to assess the relevance of the judgment to some known performance.

E. Submit manufacturer’s installation procedures for each type of product. F. Approved Applicator: Submit document from manufacturer wherein manufacturer

recognizes the installer as qualified or submit a list of past projects to demonstrate capability to perform intended work.

G. Upon completion, installer shall provide written certification that materials were installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and details.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Firestopping systems (materials and design):

1. Shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as required by local building codes and as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E814 or UL 1479 fire tests in a configuration that is representative of field conditions.

The F rating must be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. T rating when required by code authority shall be based on measurement of the temperature rise on penetrating item(s). The fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column.

2. For joints, must be tested to UL 2079 with movement capabilities equal to those of the anticipated conditions.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07840 Additions and Renovations Firestopping ENG-12-061 Page 3

B. Firestopping materials & systems must be capable of closing or filling through-openings created by 1) the burning or melting of combustible pipes, cable jacketing, or pipe insulation materials, or 2) deflection of sheet metal due to thermal expansion (electrical & mechanical duct work).

C. Firestopping material shall be asbestos and lead free and shall not incorporate nor require the use of hazardous solvents.

D. Firestopping sealants must be flexible, allowing for normal pipe movement. E. Firestopping materials shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or

pulling back from contact surfaces. F. Firestopping materials shall be moisture resistant, and may not dissolve in water

after curing. G. All firestopping materials shall be manufactured by one manufacturer (to the

maximum extent possible). H. Installation of firestopping systems shall be performed by a contractor (or

contractors) trained or approved by the firestop manufacturer. I. Material used shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation

instructions.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver material in the manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or packages with the manufacturer’s name, product identification, lot number, UL label, and mixing and installation instructions as applicable.

B. Store materials in the original, unopened containers or packages, and under conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

C. All firestop materials shall be installed prior to expiration of shelf life. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conform to manufacturer’s printed instructions for installation and when applicable, curing in accordance with temperature and humidity. Conform to ventilation and safety requirements.

B. Verify the condition of the substrates before starting work. C. Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when

temperatures fall outside the manufacturer's suggested limits. D. Care should be taken to ensure that firestopping materials are installed so as not to

contaminate adjacent surfaces.

1.8 SEQUENCING

A. Schedule firestopping after installation of penetrants but prior to concealing the openings.

B. Firestopping shall precede gypsum board finishing. 1.9 PROTECTION

A Where firestopping is installed at locations which will remain exposed in the completed work, provide protection as necessary to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces and finishes, and protect as necessary against damage from other construction activities.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07840 Additions and Renovations Firestopping ENG-12-061 Page 4

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. Firestopping materials and systems shall meet the requirements specified herein. B. Architect must approve in writing any alternates to the materials and systems

specified herein. C. All firestop products and systems shall be designed and installed so that the basic

sealing system will allow the full restoration of the thermal and fire resistance properties of the barrier being penetrated with minimal repair if penetrants are subsequently removed.

D. For applications where combustible penetrants are involved, i.e.. insulated and plastic pipe, a suitable intumescent material must be used.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Specified Technologies Inc./GE Pensil® (STI), Somerville, NJ 08876, Phone: (800) 992-1180

B. 3M C. USG D. W.R. GRACE

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Intumescent Firestop Sealants and Caulks: 1. STI SpecSeal SSS100 B. Latex Firestop Sealant: 1. STI SpecSeal LC150 Sealant C. Acrylic Water-Based Sealant: 1. STI SpecSeal ES100 Elastomeric Sealant D. Silicone Firestop Sealants and Caulks: 1. STI SpecSeal Pensil 300 E. Firestop Putty: 1. STI SpecSeal SSP100 Firestop Putty Bars and Pads F. Firestop Collars: 1. STI SpecSeal SSC Firestop Collars G. Wrap Strips: 1. SpecSeal SSW Wrap Strip H. 2-Part Silicone Firestop Foam: 1. STI SpecSeal Pensil 200 I. Firestop Mortar: 1. STI SpecSeal SSM Mortar J. Firestop Pillows: 1. STI SpecSeal SSB Pillows K. Elastomeric Spray: 1. STI SpecSeal AS Elastomeric Spray L. Accessories: Forming/Damming Materials: Mineral fiberboard or other type as per manufacturer

recommendation.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07840 Additions and Renovations Firestopping ENG-12-061 Page 5

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRESTOPPING

A. General: Provide firestopping for conditions specified whether or not firestopping is indicated,

and if indicated, whether such material is designed as insulation, safing, or otherwise.

B. Through-Penetrations: Firestopping shall be installed in all open penetrations and in the annular space in all

penetrations in any bearing or non-bearing fire-rated barrier. C. Membrane-Penetrations: Where required by code, all membrane-penetrations in rated walls shall be protected

with firestopping products that meet the requirements of third party time/temperature testing.

D. Construction Joints/Gaps: Firestopping shall be provided: a) between the edges of floor slabs and exterior walls b) between the tops of walls and the underside of floors c) in the control joint in masonry walls and floors d) in expansion joints E. Smoke-Stopping: As required by the other Sections, Smoke-Stops shall be provided for Through-

Penetrations, Membrane-Penetrations, and Construction Gaps with a material approved and tested for such application.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the areas and conditions where firestops are to be installed and notify the architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the contractor in a manner acceptable to the architect and in accordance with Section 01039.

B. Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of firestop products.

C. Verify that all pipe, conduit, cable, and other items which penetrate fire-rated construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of firestops.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Installation of firestops shall be performed by an applicator/installer qualified and trained by the manufacturer. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s detailed installation procedures.

2. Apply firestops in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance requirements, acceptable sample installations, and manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Unless specified and approved, all insulation used in conjunction with through-penetrants shall remain intact and undamaged and may not be removed.

4. Seal holes and penetrations to ensure an effective smoke seal.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07840 Additions and Renovations Firestopping ENG-12-061 Page 6

5. In areas of high traffic, protect firestopping materials from damage. If the opening is large, install firestopping materials capable of supporting the weight of a human.

6. Insulation types specified in other sections shall not be installed in lieu of firestopping material specified herein.

7. All combustible penetrants (e.g. non-metallic pipes or insulated metallic pipes) shall be firestopped using products and systems tested in a configuration representative of the field condition.

B. Dam Construction: When required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings, damming or packing materials may be utilized. Combustible damming material must be removed after appropriate curing. Noncombustible damming materials may be left as a permanent component of the firestop system.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General:

1. Prepare and install firestopping systems in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations.

2. Follow safety procedures recommended in the Material Safety Data Sheets. 3. Finish surfaces of firestopping which are to remain exposed in the completed

work to a uniform and level condition. 4. All areas of work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable Code

Authorities. 5. Correct unacceptable firestops and provide additional inspection to verify

compliance with this specification. 3.5 CLEANING A. General: 1. Remove spilled and excess materials adjacent to firestopping without damaging

adjacent surfaces. 2. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spill overs or

damage to adjacent surfaces.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07900 Additions and Renovations Joint Sealants ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Preconstruction Joint Sealant-Substrate Tests: Submit substrate materials representative of actual joint surfaces to joint sealant manufacturer for laboratory testing of joint sealants for adhesion to primed and unprimed substrates and for compatibility with joint substrates and other joint-related materials.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. In addition to product data submit the following: 1. Samples of each type and color of joint sealant required. 2. Certified test reports for joint sealants evidencing compliance with requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.

B. Colors: Provide color indicated of exposed joint sealants or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

C. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated complying with ASTM C 920 requirements. 1. Two-Part, Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 12-1/2; Uses

NT, M, G, A, and O. 2. One-Part, Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 12-1/2; Uses

T, M, G, A, and O. 3. Multi-Part, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses

T, NT, M, G, A, and O with the additional capability to withstand 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100 percent movement when tested per ASTM C 719 and still comply with other requirements of ASTM C 920.

4. One-Part, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and as follows: a. Uses NT, M, G, A, and O.

1) 35 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 70 percent movement.

5. One-Part, High-Modulus, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, M, G, A, and O.

6. One-Part, Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O.

7. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07900 Additions and Renovations Joint Sealants ENG-12-061 Page 2

joints with nonporous substrates exposed to high humidity and temperature extremes.

8. One-Part, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant for Use T: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses T, M, and O with the additional capability, when tested per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following percentage changes in joint width as measured at time of application and still comply with other requirements of ASTM C 920: b. 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100

percent movement. c. 100 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in

compression for a total of 150 percent movement. 9. Multi-Part, Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25,

and as follows: d. Uses NT, M, G, A, and O. e. Uses NT, M, A, and O. f. Uses T, NT, M, G, A, and O. g. Uses T, NT, M, A, and O.

10. Multi-Part, Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and as follows: h. Uses T, M, G, A, and O. i. Uses T, M, A, and O.

11. Multi-Part, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type M, Grade P, Class 25, and as follows: j. Uses T, M, G, A, and O. k. Uses T, M, A, and O. l. Uses T, M, and O.

12. One-Part, Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, M, A, and O.

13. One-Part, Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and as follows: m. Uses T, NT, M, G, A, and O. n. Uses T, NT, A, and O.

14. One-Part, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type S, Grade P, Class 25, and as follows: o. Uses T, M, G, A, and O. p. Uses T, M, A, and O. q. Uses T, M and O.

D. Acrylic Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 or FS TT-S-00230, or both, with capability, when tested per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following percentage change in joint width existing at time of application without failing adhesively or cohesively: 15. Maximum cyclic movement capability: plus or minus 7.5 percent.

E. Butyl Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying with ASTM C 1085 and formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids to be nonstaining, paintable, and have a tack-free time of 24 hours or less.

F. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: One-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable, acrylic-emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834.

G. Silicone-Emulsion Sealant: Product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, with ASTM C 920, that accommodates joint

Ascension Counseling Center Section 07900 Additions and Renovations Joint Sealants ENG-12-061 Page 3

movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent.

H. Acoustical Sealant: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90.

I. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound.

J. Tape Sealant: Solvent-free, butyl-based tape sealant with a solids content of 100 percent formulated to be nonstaining, paintable, and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces with or without reinforcement thread to prevent stretch and packaged on rolls with release paper on one side.

K. Preformed Foam Sealant: Preformed, precompressed, open-cell, high-density urethane foam sealant impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent; in precompressed sizes and in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; permanently elastic, mildew-resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealants; and as follows: 16. Impregnating Agent: Manufacturer's standard. 17. Density: Manufacturer's standard. 18. Backing: Pressure-sensitive adhesive factory applied to one side, with protective

wrapping. L. Sealant Backings, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants,

primers, and other joint fillers; approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 19. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing,

nonextruding strips of plastic foam of material indicated below, and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. r. Open-cell polyurethane foam.

20. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to -26 deg F (-32 deg C).

21. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing bond between sealant and joint filler or other materials at back of joint.

M. Primer: As recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1193. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with ASTM C 919 for use of joint

sealants in acoustical applications.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 08

DOORS AND WINDOWS

Ascension Counseling Center Section 08111 Additions and Renovations Standard Steel Doors and Frames ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 08111 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. With manufacturer's standard details and specifications for steel doors and frames, submit shop drawings showing application to project, as required.

1.2 STANDARDS

A. In addition to other specified requirements, comply with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" ANSI/SDI-100.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Amweld Building Products, Inc. B. Ceco Corp. C. Copco Door Co. D. Curries Company. E. Deansteel Manufacturing Co. F. Fenestra Corp. G. Kewanee Corp. H. Mesker Door Co. I. Pioneer Industries. J. Premier Products, Inc. (Formerly Dittco). K. Republic Builders Products. L. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, or drawing quality, ASTM A 642, hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 525, with A60 or G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized.

B. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gage sheet steel; galvanized where used with galvanized frames.

C. Shop Applied Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Provide units that display appropriate UL or FM labels for fire-rating indicated.

E. Fabrication: Fabricate units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp or buckle. Weld exposed joints continuously, grind, dress, and make smooth, flush and invisible.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 08111 Additions and Renovations Standard Steel Doors and Frames ENG-12-061 Page 2

F. Prepare steel doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping, complying with ANSI A 115 "Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware." 1. Reinforce units to receive surface-applied finish hardware to be field applied. 2. Locate finish hardware as indicated or, if not indicated, per DHI "Recommended

Locations for Builder's Hardware."

2.3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Doors: SDI grades and models specified below or as indicated on drawings or schedules:

1. Interior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100, Grade III, Extra Heavy Duty, Model 4, minimum 16-gage galvanized steel faces in compliance with SDI 112.

2. Exterior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100, Grade III, Extra Heavy Duty, Model 4, minimum 16-gage galvanized steel faces in compliance with SDI 112.

2.4 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI-100, of the types and styles indicated, for materials quality, metal gages, and construction details. Provide frames of welded-unit construction fabricated of ASTM A366 cold-rolled steel in accordance with SDI established quality standards. 1. Provide standard hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed

lights, and other openings as indicated. a. Fabricate frames welded corners.

2. Prepare frames to receive 2 silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and on heads of double-door frames.

3. Protect inside faces of frames in plaster or masonry wall construction which are placed with anti-freeze additives, using high-build fibered asphalt emulsion coating.

4. Form exterior frames from 16-gage galvanized steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install hollow-metal units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and final shop drawings (if any). Fit doors to frames and floors with clearances specified in ANSI/SDI-100. 1. Install frames in accordance with SDI 105. 2. Install fire-rated units in accordance with NFPA Std. No. 80. 3. Finish hardware is specified in another Division 8 section.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 08211 Additions and Renovations Flush Wood Doors ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. In addition to product data, submit the following: 1. Shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind

of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for veneer matching and factory finishing and other pertinent data. For factory-machined doors, indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for locksets and other cutouts adjacent to light and louver openings.

2. Samples of actual materials in small sections for each face material and finish. 1.2 QUALITY STANDARDS

A. Comply with the following standards: 1. NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors," of the

National Wood Window and Door Association. 2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the

Architectural Woodwork Institute. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide doors by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 2. Ampco Products, Inc. 3. Buell Door Co. 4. Chappell Door Co. 5. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc. 6. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division. 7. Fenestra Corporation. 8. Graham Manufacturing Corp. 9. Haley Brothers, Inc. 10. Ideal Wood Products, Inc. 11. IPIK Door Co., Inc. 12. Marlite. 13. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 14. Poncraft Door Co. 15. Ragland Manufacturing Co., Inc. 16. V-T Industries Inc. 17. Weyerhauser Co.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 08211 Additions and Renovations Flush Wood Doors ENG-12-061 Page 2

2.2 DOORS

A. Interior Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: As follows: 1. Faces: 1/8” 3-ply plywood meeting AWI or NWWDA grading rules hardwood face

veneers. 2. Grade: Premium. 3. Construction: 7 plies. 4. Construction: Hardboard faces glued directly to core. 5. Core: Particleboard core. 6. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before

veneering. (Type I). B. Veneer Matching: Provide doors with the following veneer matching:

1. Book matching. C. Pairs and Sets: Provide pair matching and set matching. D. Fabricate flush wood doors to comply with following requirements:

1. In sizes indicated for job-site fitting. 2. Factory fit doors to comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality

standard. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire-resistance-rated doors. 3. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 4. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable

requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. 5. Provide metal flashing at top of outswinging units.

E. Shop prime exposed portions of doors for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and referenced quality standard and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to

requirements of NFPA 80. B. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels. Machine doors for

hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 08410 Additions and Renovations Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing stock assemblies according to test methods indicated.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include fabrication methods, data on finishing, hardware and accessories and surface maintenance recommendations.

B. Shop Drawings: Include layout, installation details, 1/4-inch scale elevations, detail sections of composite members, anchors and reinforcement, hardware mounting heights and glazing details.

C. Hardware schedule organized into sets. Include item and manufacturer's name and designation of each item required.

D. Samples: Pairs of samples of each finish on 12-inch-long sections. Where normal color variations are anticipated, include sets indicating full range of color variations.

E. Certified test reports showing systems have been tested and comply with requirements.

1.3 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer who has completed installations similar to those required and whose work has resulted in a record of successful in-service performance.

1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Drawings indicate size, profile, and dimensional requirements and are based on specific types and models indicated. Aluminum entrance and storefront by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations do not change the design concept.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Kawneer B. US Aluminum C. Approved equal

2.2 STOREFRONT WINDOWS

A. System

Ascension Counseling Center Section 08410 Additions and Renovations Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts ENG-12-061 Page 2

1. Framing system shall provide for flush glazing on all sides with no projecting stops. Vertical and horizontal framing members shall have a nominal face dimension of 1 3/4 inch or 2 inch. Overall depth shall be 4 1/2 inches.

B. Products

1. Exterior Windows: Kawneer TRIFAB VG 451T, center plane or equal by US Aluminum.

2.3 STOREFRONT DOORS A. Products

1. Kawneer, Standard Entrances, 350 Medium Stile 2. Equal to above by US Aluminum

2.4 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Glazing Materials: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture and air infiltration requirements. As specified in Section 08800.

2.5 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Sealant and Backing Materials: 1. Perimeter Sealant: As specified in Section 07900.

2.6 HARDWARE

A. Weather Stripping, Sill Sweep Strips, Thresholds, Pivots, Closers: Manufacturer’s standard type to suit application.

B. Push/Pull handles: As provided by manufacturer. C. Locks: Deadbolt with thumbturn: As provided by manufacturer.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.

B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof.

C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. G. Provide matching break metal for wrapping at structural members interrupting

system; install so as to provide a complete, continuous and uniform appearance at the window wall.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Shop Finishing: Kawneer Permanodic AA-M12C22A31, AAMA 611, Architectural Class II Clear Anodic Coating (Color #17 Clear).

Ascension Counseling Center Section 08410 Additions and Renovations Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts ENG-12-061 Page 3

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and conditions that affect installation. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels. Install in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades. Provide support and anchor securely in place.

B. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface-mounted hardware. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant, or with joint fillers or gaskets. D. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section for installation of glass and other panels glazed

into doors and framing.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware to function properly.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean completed system after installation. Avoid damage to coatings. B. Clean glass after installation. Comply with "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning

and maintenance.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 08710 Additions and Renovations Door Hardware ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit samples of hardware items, showing each required finish from each

manufacturer (for acceptance of color and texture only). B. Submit final hardware schedule organized by "hardware sets," to indicate specifically

the product to be furnished for each item required on each door. 1. Furnish templates to each fabricator of doors and frames as required for

hardware preparation. C. Furnish a keying schedule indexed by door number, showing key sets and hardware

headings. Include all special keying notes and stamping. Submit three (3) copies for approval.

D. For fire-rated openings provide hardware tested and listed by UL or FM (NFPA Standard 80). On panic exit devices provide UL or FM label indicating "Fire Exit Hardware."

1.2 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish the following warranties to cover defects in materials and workmanship: 1. 10 Years Closers 2. 5 Years Exit Devices 3. 1 Year All other hardware

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers The following manufacturers products were used to establish these specifications:

1. Hager 2. McKinney 3. Yale 4. Sargent

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: Furnish fasteners as required for the proper installation of the hardware. Install all finish hardware only with fasteners furnished by the manufacturers. Warranties and labels will be void on material installed with unauthorized fasteners.

B. Hinges: Furnish non-removable pins for all swing out exterior doors and non-rising pins at all others.

Furnish the following sizes: 1. 4.5” high hinges for 1-3/4” thick doors up to 36” in width. 2. 5” high hinges for 1-3/4” thick doors 37” to 48” in width. 3. 6” high hinges for 1-3/4” thick doors over 48” in width. 4. Hinge width shall be determined by the trim conditions affecting the throw.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 08710 Additions and Renovations Door Hardware ENG-12-061 Page 2

Furnish the following quantities: 1. Two hinges per leaf for doors up to 60” in height. 2. Three hinges per leaf for doors up to 90” in height. 3. Four hinges per leaf for doors up to 120” in height. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved manufacturers and products.

Hager Bommer Finish Butt Hinges BB1279 1250 652 Standard weight ball bearing BB5000 4310 652 Spring hinge

C. Lock Sets 1. Furnish locks constructed of heavy gage steel cases, corrosion protected, and

closed on all sides to protect internal parts, and have the following features: a. Adjustable, beveled and armored fronts, with 2-3/4” backset. b. Two piece anti-friction, stainless steel latch bolts, with 3/4” throw. c. Auxiliary latch bolts. d. Lock sets with deadbolts, stainless steel, with 1” throw. Furnish curved lip strikes of the length required. Furnish solid cast levers with

wrought roses or escutcheons as listed, with thru bolted mounting to ensure correct alignment and proper operation. Furnish fasteners as required by door and frame material.

2. Cylinders: Subject to compliance with requirements, approved manufacturers and products.

Yale Corbin Finish Mortise Locks 5401LN CL3610 626 Passage Function 5402LN CL3620 626 Privacy Function 5404LN CL3651 626 Entry Function 5404LN CL3651 626 Office Function 5405LN CL3657 626 Storage Function AUE AZD 626 Lever and escutcheon trim

D. Exit Devices and Mullions Subject to compliance with requirements, approved manufacturers and products.

Yale Corbin Finish Security Exit Devices 7155 ED 5200-M52 630 Rim type with cylinder

521F F257 630 Trim plate with cylinder E. Door Closers

Subject to compliance with requirements, approved manufacturers and products. Yale Corbin Finish Security Exit Devices UNI400 DC2410xA11 689 H/D Parallel unitized arm

4400 DC2200 689 Regular arm F. Push and Pull Plates

Subject to compliance with requirements, approved manufacturers and products. Hager Trimco Finish Types 23Q 1191-5J 630 Offset pull-18”ctc

G. Protection Plates Subject to compliance with requirements, approved manufacturers and products.

Hager Trimco Finish Types 190S 050 630 Mop, Kick and Armor Plates

H. Door Stops and Holders Subject to compliance with requirements, approved manufacturers and products.

Hager Trimco Finish Types 269F 1209 Black Heavy duty type floor stop

Ascension Counseling Center Section 08710 Additions and Renovations Door Hardware ENG-12-061 Page 3

2.3 FINISHES

A. Finishes and Base Metals: Furnish finishes which comply with the following: ANSI A156.18-2000 standards. Furnish the following finishes and base metals, see hardware sets for finishes required. ANSI No. Finish Description and Base Metals 600 Primed for Painting on Steel 626 Satin Chrome-Plated on Brass or Bronze 628 Satin Aluminum on Aluminum 630 Satin Stainless Steel on Stainless Steel 652 Satin Chrome-Plated on Steel 689 Silver Aluminum-Painted on Aluminum or Steel

2.4 KEYING

A. Keying Requirements: Key all locks and cylinders to existing system on campus. Furnish all locks and cylinders factory keyed.

Furnish the following keys: 1. 6 each Grand and/or Master Keys. 2. 2 each Change Keys per lock and cylinder.

B. The finish hardware supplier will meet with the Architect and Owner to establish the final keying requirements. Furnish the Owner at completion of project, a copy of the factory bitting list.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware Mounting Locations: As recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Install each hardware item to comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. Remove excess sealant and clean adjacent surfaces.

D. Hardware Adjustment: Return to Project one month after Owner's occupancy, and adjust hardware to proper operation and function. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper maintenance and adjustment.

3.2 HARDWARE SETS

A. each to have: Hinges: Provided by Storefront Manufacturer

Hardware Set No. 1: Door No. 100

Locket: Provided by Storefront Manufacturer Door Closers: Provided by Storefront Manufacturer Handicap Threshold: 520SN length as required B. each to have: Hinges: BB1279

Hardware Set No. 2: Door No. 105

Privacy Locket: 5402LN cylinder as required Door Closers: UNI 400 size as required *Install lock on Corridor Side

Ascension Counseling Center Section 08710 Additions and Renovations Door Hardware ENG-12-061 Page 4

C. each to have: Hinges: BB1279

Hardware Set No. 3: Door Nos. 120 and 127

Office Locket: 5404LN cylinder as required

D. each to have: Hinges: BB1279

Hardware Set No. 4: Door No. 123

Passage Locket: 5401LN cylinder as required

E. each to have: Hinges: BB1279

Hardware Set No. 5: Door No. 126

Entry Locket: 5404LN cylinder as required Door Closers: UNI 400 size as required *Door equipped with access control device. F. each to have: Hinges: BB1279

Hardware Set No. 6: Door No. 128

Privacy Locket: 5402LN cylinder as required Door Closers: UNI 400 size as required G. each to have: Hinges: BB1279

Hardware Set No. 7: Door No. 132

Office Locket: 5404LN cylinder as required H. each to have: Hinges: BB1279

Hardware Set No. 8: Door No. 135

Entry Locket: 5404LN cylinder as required Door Closers: UNI 400 size as required I. each to have: Hinges: BB1279

Hardware Set No. 9: Door No. 137

Entry Locket: 5404LN cylinder as required Door Closers: UNI 400 size as required

J. each to have: Hinges: BB1279

Hardware Set No. 10: Door No. 138

Storage Locket: 5405LN cylinder as required

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 08800 Additions and Renovations Glazing ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 08800 GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading, without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. 1. Glass Design: Provide glass lites in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or

heat-treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria based on analysis of Project loads and in-service conditions:

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. In addition to product data, submit 12-inch-square samples of each type of glass indicated, except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12-inch-long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view.

B. Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.

C. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants.

D. Compatibility test report from insulating glass edge sealant manufacturer indicating glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials.

E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers, "FGMA Glazing Manual," and publications of AAMA, LSGA, and SIGMA as applicable to products indicated, except where more stringent requirements are indicated.

F. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.

G. Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Products identical to those tested per ASTM E 152 for doors and ASTM E 163 for window assemblies; both labeled and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers 1. Viracon, Solarscreen Low-E (VE) Insulating Glass (VE 2-2M). 2. Approved equal. B. Exterior fixed windows: 1” insulated, vision glass as scheduled.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 08800 Additions and Renovations Glazing ENG-12-061 Page 2

2.2 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Products complying with ASTM C 920 requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section, in colors indicated, compatible with other materials they will contact. 1. Additional Movement Capability: Provide products, when tested per ASTM

C 719, with the capability to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.

B. Glazing Sealant for Fire-Resistant Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire-resistive rating.

C. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape, with or without spacer rod as recommended by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, and complying with AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

D. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, polyvinyl chloride foam tape, factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces, and complying with AAMA 800 for product 810.5.

E. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.

F. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded, gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 5. Any material indicated above.

G. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below, complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3. Silicone. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 5. Any material indicated above.

H. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: Products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

I. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications as required to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Clean cut or flat grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner

that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 08800 Additions and Renovations Glazing ENG-12-061 Page 3

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants,

gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in "FGMA Glazing Manual."

B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. C. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass

lites. D. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar

characteristics. E. Lock Strip Gasket Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's

printed recommendations. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.

F. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter.

G. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period.

H. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 09

FINISHES

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09260 Additions and Renovations Gypsum Board Systems ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 STANDARDS

A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For assemblies indicated to have STC ratings,

provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide gypsum board and related products by one of the following: 1. Domtar Gypsum. 2. Georgia-Pacific Corp. 3. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. 4. United States Gypsum Co.

2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Wood Stud Framing for Walls and Partitions: Comply with the following: 1. Maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions:

a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 lbf per sq. ft. 2. Fasteners for Wood Stud Framing: Type, material, size, corrosion resistance,

holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates and complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated.

3. Sizes: As indicated on Drawings. 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS

A. Gypsum Board: Provide gypsum board of types indicated, in maximum lengths available, to minimize end joints: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, thickness as indicated.

a. Type: Hi-Impact Brand XP Wallboard, unless otherwise indicated. b. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces. c. Edges: Tapered.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09260 Additions and Renovations Gypsum Board Systems ENG-12-061 Page 2

2. Gypsum Backing Board for Multilayer Applications: ASTM C 442 or A 36, thickness as indicated. a. Type: Type X, 5/8” thick for fire-resistive-rated assemblies.

3. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630, thickness as indicated. a. Type: Regular, 5/8” thick for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. b. Type: Type X, 5/8” thick for fire-resistive-rated assemblies.

4. Exterior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 931, thickness as indicated. a. Type: Regular, 5/8” thick unless otherwise indicated.

5. Glass-Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1178, of type and thickness indicated below: a. Type and Thickness: Regular, 5/8” thick, unless otherwise indicated. b. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8” thick, for fire-resistive-rated assemblies.

B. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:

1. Material: Formed metal, plastic, or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the following requirement: a. Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process.

2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047: a. Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint

compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated. c. L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound.

Use L-bead where indicated. d. U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without

application of joint compound. Use U-bead where indicated. e. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip

covering slot opening. C. Gypsum Board Joint Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475 and ASTM C 840, and as

follows: 1. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Use open-weave glass-fiber tape where recommended by gypsum board manufacturer with setting-type joint compound.

2. Setting-Type Joint Compound: Factory-packaged, job-mixed chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. a. For topping compound, use sandable formulation.

3. Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-packaged, vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements: a. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory premixed. b. Job-Mixed Formulation: Powder product, mixed with water at Project Site. c. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and first coat over

fasteners and flanges of corner beads and edge trim. d. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. e. All-purpose compound formulated as both taping and topping compound.

D. Miscellaneous Materials: As follows, recommended by gypsum board manufacturer: 1. Laminating Adhesives: Product recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. 2. Fastening Adhesive for Wood: ASTM C 557. 3. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for fastening gypsum board to

steel members less than 0.03 inch thick. 4. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to

steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 5. Gypsum Board Nails: ASTM C 514.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09260 Additions and Renovations Gypsum Board Systems ENG-12-061 Page 3

6. Corrosion-resistant-coated steel drill screws of size and type recommended by board manufacturer for fastening cementitious backer units.

7. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

8. Exposed and Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834.

9. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

10. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

11. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, thickness and maximum permeance rating as follows: a. 6.0 mils, 0.13 perms.

E. Finish Products: As follows: 1. Primer: Of type recommended by finish manufacturer. 2. Smooth Finish: Level 5 Finish. 3. Architect shall approve all smooth finish samples for application.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Install wood stud framing as follows: 1. Do not bridge building expansion joints with support systems; frame both sides

of joints with furring and other supports as indicated. 2. Install wood studs with bottom and top tracks anchored to substrates. Isolate

system from building structure to prevent transfer of loading and deflections into metal support system, both vertically and horizontally.

3. Frame door and other openings with studs to comply with manufacturer's recommendations for size of opening, weight and height of doors, and stud size, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Install polyethylene vapor retarder, where indicated, to comply with the following requirements: a. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor

transmission. Secure in place with mechanical fasteners or adhesives. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates.

b. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall openings, and at lap joints.

c. Seal joints in vapor retarders caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor retarder tape. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarder immediately before concealing it with the installation of gypsum board or other construction.

5. Install supplementary framing, furring, blocking, and bracing at openings and terminations in gypsum board assemblies and where required to support other work that cannot be adequately supported on gypsum board alone.

3.2 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and as follows: 1. Isolate gypsum board construction from abutting structural and masonry work.

Provide edge trim and acoustical sealant as recommended by manufacturer.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09260 Additions and Renovations Gypsum Board Systems ENG-12-061 Page 4

2. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, without gaps, and support, where necessary, to prevent movement or dislocation.

3. Install water-resistant backing board where indicated to receive thin-set tile and similar rigid applied finishes at tubs, showers, and where indicated.

4. Install exterior gypsum board for exterior ceilings and soffits where indicated. 5. Screw gypsum board to wood supports. 6. Screw both layers to supports where double-layer work is indicated or otherwise

required. 7. Do not bridge building expansion joints. Leave a space of the width indicated

between boards, and trim both edges for installation of sealant or gasket. B. Finishing Gypsum Board Assemblies: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints

(both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere, as required, to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum board finish indicated. Provide Level 4 Finish as follows: 1. Prefill:

a. Use setting-type joint compound. Mix joint compound according to manufacturer's directions.

b. Fill joints between boards flush to top of eased or beveled edge. c. Fill joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings in fire-rated partitions. d. Wipe off excess compound and allow compound to harden.

2. Taping: a. Butter taping compound into inside corners and joints. b. Center tape over joints and press down into fresh compound. c. Remove excess compound. d. Tape joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings.

3. First coat: a. Use taping or all-purpose drying-type compound. b. Immediately after bedding tape, apply skim coat of compound and allow to

dry completely in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. c. Apply first coat of compound over flanges of trim and accessories, and over

exposed fastener heads and finish level with board surface. 4. Second coat:

a. After first coat treatment is dried, apply second coat of compound over tape and trim, feathering compound 2 inches beyond edge of first coat.

5. Third coat: a. After second coat has dried, sand surface lightly and apply thin finish coat to

joints, fasteners and trim, feathering compound 2 inches beyond edge of second coat.

b. Allow third coat to dry. Apply additional compound, and touch-up and sand, to provide surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready for application of finish.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09300 Additions and Renovations Tile ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 09300 TILE

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work includes all material, labor and coordination required for the complete installation of all hard tile.

B. Types of tile work in this section include the following: 1. Glazed ceramic wall tile. 2. Stone threshold.

C. Related Sections: The following sections include work that is related to the installation of tile: 1. Division 9 section Gypsum Drywall for cementitious backer units installed as part

of gypsum wall board system. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical information and installation instructions for materials required, except bulk materials.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source of Materials: Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout, and setting materials.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HOLDING

A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and

labels intact until time of use. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter or other causes.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer’s printed recommendations.

B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup. Maintain temperature at not less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit (10 degrees Celsius) in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer’s instructions.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09300 Additions and Renovations Tile ENG-12-061 Page 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following manufacturers:

1. Manufacturers of Ceramic Tile: a. Crossville b. American Olean c. Dal-Tile

2. Manufacturers of Latex-Portland Cement Mortars: a. Bostik Construction Products. b. Jamo, Inc. c. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.

3. Manufacturers of Dry-set Grouts: a. Bostik Construction Products. b. Jamo, Inc. c. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.

2.2 GENERAL PRODUCTS

A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A138.1 “American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile” for types and grades of tile indicated.

1. Furnish tile complying with “Standard Grade” requirements unless otherwise indicated.

B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting.

C. CTI Standard for Glazed and Unglazed Special Purpose and Faience Tile: Comply with CTI Test Procedure CTI-69-5 for glazed and unglazed special purpose and faience tile indicated.

D. Colors, Textures and Patterns: For tile, grout and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures or other appearance characteristics, provide products to match characteristics indicated or, if not otherwise indicates, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard.

E. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required provide back or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless another mounting method is indicated.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Ceramic Wall Tile (as indicated on Drawings): Provide the following floor tile: 1. 12” x 12” x 1/4”, wall tile.

B. Ceramic Base Tile (as indicated on Drawings): Provide the following wall tile: 1. 6” x 12” x 1/4”, wall tile.

C. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements: 1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile, where

applicable. 2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer’s standard shapes:

a. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide a

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09300 Additions and Renovations Tile ENG-12-061 Page 3

reduction in thickness from ½” to ¼” across nominal 2” dimension. 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1 B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Provide product complying with ANSI A118.4 and the

following requirements for composition. 1. Prepackaged dry mortar mix incorporating dry polymer additive in the form of re-

emulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site. C. Wire Reinforcement: 2” x 2”, 16 gauge x 16 gauge welded wire.

2.5 GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Epoxy Grout: 1. Laticrete Spectralock Epoxy Grout

2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers for accurately proportioning of materials, water or additive content, mixing equipment and mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive tile work and conditions under which tile will be installed. Do not proceed with tile work until surfaces and conditions comply with requirements indicated in referenced tile installation standard.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation”; comply with TCA installation methods indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as applicable to installation conditions shown.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Pre-form cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Lay out tile work and center tile fields both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown. 1. For tile mounted in sheets make joints between tile sheets same width as joints

within tile sheets so that extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work. E. Lay out tile wainscot to next full tile beyond nominal dimensions indicated. F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant filled joints, including

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09300 Additions and Renovations Tile ENG-12-061 Page 4

control, contraction and isolation joints, where directed by the Architect. Do not saw cut joints.

G. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installations standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts sand-Portland cement, dry-set, commercial Portland

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and

grout manufacturer’s printed instructions, but no sooner that 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.

B. Finish Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean free of cracked, chipped, broken, inbonded, or otherwise defective tile work.

C. Protection: When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during the construction period to prevent staining, damage and wear.

D. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors at least 7 days after grouting is completed.

E. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09511 Additions and Renovations Suspended Acoustical Ceilings ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The work includes all material, labor and coordination required for the complete installation of all acoustical ceilings. 1. Removing, reinstalling, and replacing acoustic tile and grid as a result of the

sprinkling work. Coordinate with the sub. a. The Contractor is responsible for all subs per Division 1. This sub is noted

due to a performance specification and no design drawings. B. Types of acoustical ceilings specified in this section include the following:

1. Acoustical panel ceilings, exposed suspension. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system required.

B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following: 1. 6" square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern and color. 2. 1 set of 12" long samples of exposed runners and moldings for each color and

systme, type required. C. Certificates: Submit certificates from manufacturers of acoustical ceiling units and

suspension systems attesting that their products comply with specification requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceiling components that are identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, according to ASTM test method indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate marking of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84,

a. Flame Spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09511 Additions and Renovations Suspended Acoustical Ceilings ENG-12-061 Page 2

B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Space Enclosures: Do not install interior acoustical ceiling until wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra material to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2.0% of

amount installed. 2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed

component equal to 2.0% of amount installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers:

1. USG: DX B. Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel; hot-dipped galvanized coating. C. Grid Finish: Baked polyester; White. D. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel, size and type to suit application.

(channels shall be hot-dipped galvanized)

2.2 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Manufacturers: 1. USG: Vinyl ClimaPlus

B. Acoustical Tile: Conforming to the following: 1. Size: 24 x 24 inches 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch 3. Finish: Fine Texture 4. Edge: Square 5. Color: White

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09511 Additions and Renovations Suspended Acoustical Ceilings ENG-12-061 Page 3

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout if acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans wherever possible.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and to comply with governing regulations, fire-resistance rating requirements as indicated, and CISCA standards applicable to the work.

B. Arrange acoustical units and orient in manner shown by reflected ceiling plans. 1. Install tile with pattern running in one direction.

C. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C636, with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers not less than 6" from each end and spaced 4'-0" along each carrying channel or direct-hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". 1. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to inserts,

eyescrews or other devices which are secure and appropriate for the substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures.

2. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with installation or other objects within ceiling plenum which are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal force by bracing, countersplaying or other equally effective means.

D. Install edge mouldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. 1. Screw-attach mouldings to substrate at intervals not over 16" on center and not

more than 3" from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0".

2. Minimum widths at wall shall be 6". Where as-built conditions or reflected ceiling plan require less than 6", coordinate with the Architect.

3. At all smoke tight corridors, caulk the joint at the wall. E. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges

concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge mouldings and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09650 Additions and Renovations Resilient Flooring ENG-12-061 Page 1 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on Drawings and in schedules. Replace floor tile and base where disturbed for installation of new doors and frames.

B. Where leveling material is required on existing floor slabs, Contractor shall use an appropriate self-leveling material for the depth required.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, and sealants.

B. No materials shall contain asbestos. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provision of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit two copies of manufacturer's technical data and installation

instructions for each type of resilient flooring and accessory. Submit data showing compatibility of all products proposed, specifically glue, primer and joint isolation membrane.

C. Samples: Submit three sets of samples of each type, color, and finish of resilient flooring and accessory required, indicating full range of color and pattern variation. Provide full-size tile units, 12 inches square samples of sheet flooring, and 6 inches long samples of accessories.

D. Maintenance Instructions: Submit two copies of manufacturer's recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS:

A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 40 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F in areas where work is completed.

B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Moisture content of concrete slabs and environmental conditions must be within limits recommended by manufacturer of products being installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RESILIENT FLOOR AND BASE

A. Vinyl Tile 1. Armstrong- Imperial texture standard Excelon: Color to be selected by Architect 2. Tarkett-Thru Chip Standard Mottle: Color to be selected by Architect

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09650 Additions and Renovations Resilient Flooring ENG-12-061 Page 2

3. Azrock Custom Cortina: Color to be selected by Architect 4. Substitutions: Under provision of Section 01600 and Instruction to Bidders.

B. Rubber Base and accessories 1. Johnsonite: Color to be selected by Architect 2. Flexco 3. Musson 4. Roppe 5. Substitutions: Under provision of Section 01600 and Instructions to Bidders.

C. Leveling Compound (Contractor must verify application thickness required with material to be used). 1. Mapai Novaplan or M20 2. Dura-Cap or Level-Right Plus by Maxxon Corporation

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Colors and Patterns: As shown or scheduled, or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards.

B. Vinyl Tile: 1. FS SS-T-312B, Type IV, 12 x 12 x 1/8 inch gage, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Resilient Base: Provide continuous rubber

1. Height: 4 inches

base complying with FS SS-W-40A, Type I with matching end stops and preformed or molded corner units, and as follows:

2. Thickness: 1/8 inch gage 3. Style: Standard top-set cover 4. NO 4’ STRIPS ALLOWED.

D. Adhesives: Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. Products by Mapai are approved for installation.

E. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. F. Waterproofing and anti-fracture membrane: Hydroment Blacktop 90210 or equal by

Mapai shall be applied at control joints in slab before installing tile. The isolation membrane shall be compatible with the selected flooring adhesive and slab primer.

2.3 MAINTENANCE STOCK

A. At time of completing the installation, deliver stock of maintenance material to the Owner. Furnish full size units matching the units installed, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with appropriate labels. Furnish one complete carton of vinyl composition tile and 1 percent of total base material to be given to owner for storage and future use. Signed receipt required by owner’s representative.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which resilient flooring and accessories are to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09650 Additions and Renovations Resilient Flooring ENG-12-061 Page 3

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Broom Clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor. Start of flooring installation indicates acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed work.

B. Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring manufacturer for filling small

cracks and depressions in subfloors. 1. Contractor is responsible for visiting the site and shall be responsible for any

leveling required for smooth finish. 2. Unusual conditions requiring leveling are noted on the plans for the Contractor's

information. C. Perform moisture tests on concrete slabs to determine that concrete surfaces are

sufficiently cured and ready to receive flooring. Prepare previously sealed or waxed concrete floors to receive tile flooring.

D. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Place flooring with adhesive cement in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings, and edgings. Scribe around obstructions to produce neat joints, laid tight, even, and straight. Extend flooring into toe spaces, at unfinished cabinet bases, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings.

B. Tile Floors: 1. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor

offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. Where control joints are located in the slab layout floor tile for a joint at this slab joint. Review with Architect on job before proceeding.

2. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as

manufactured and packaged. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable.

3. Lay tile in "checkerboard" fashion with grain reversed in adjacent tiles. Where

existing floors require new tile because of work under this contract, remove existing tile to nearest full unit and begin installation of new, which shall match existing.

C. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to backing throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.

D. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09650 Additions and Renovations Resilient Flooring ENG-12-061 Page 4

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed flooring with heavy Kraft paper or other covering. 1. Finishing: After completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work,

thoroughly clean floors and accessories. Strip floors as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Apply polish and buff with type of polish, number of coats, and buffing procedures in compliance with flooring manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09680 Additions and Renovations Carpet ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 09680 CARPET

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. The extent of carpeting is indicated on the Drawings, in Finish Schedule and by Specifications, and is defined to include carpet and accessories. (Note carpet squares used in heavy use areas)

B. Related sections: Resilient flooring. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Firm (carpet mill) whose published product literature clearly indicates compliance with requirements of this Section.

B. General Standard: "Carpet Specifier's Handbook" by the Carpet and Rug Institute; comply with recommendations which can be reasonably applied to types of carpeting work required.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples, Carpeting: Submit 18 x 17 inch samples of each carpet required, and 6 inches lengths of exposed edge stripping, and other accessories. Provide manufacturer’s printed catalog data or all proposed carpet adhesives and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit plans of all areas to receive carpet. Indicate proposed seaming diagram. Layout to maximize use of full 12 foot widths with minimal seaming. Show direction of roll.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver carpeting materials in protective wrapping, and store inside, protected from weather, moisture and soiling.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide one of the following products provided that they meet the specifications, 2.03 CHARACTERISTICS, herein. 1. C&A - Powerbond® RS2. Lees - ErgoAire

®

3. Mannington - InfinityTM

. Cushion Six-foot

2.2 CARPET ACCESSORIES

A. Carpet Edge Guard, nonmetallic: Extruded or molded vinyl or rubber carpet edge guard of size and profile indicated; colors selected by Architect from among standard colors available within the industry.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09680 Additions and Renovations Carpet ENG-12-061 Page 2

B. Installation Adhesive: Adhesive content shall be asbestos free. Premium grade release type water proof, water base, latex cement as recommended and supplied by manufacturer to suit application and expected service. Provide flammability requirements for installed carpet in an assembly area.

C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer, for taping seams and buttering cut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile loss at seams.

D. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet and other

carpeting products; and selected by installer to meet project circumstance and requirements.

E. Maintenance Materials: Carpeting - deliver overrun (if any) and usable scraps of carpets to Owner's designated storage space, properly packaged and identified. Usable scraps are defined to include roll ends of less than 9'-0" length, and pieces of more than 3 sq ft of area and more than 8 inches wide. Dispose of smaller pieces.

G. Concrete Slab Primer and Leveling Compound: Non-staining type compatible with carpet, pad and glue to be used.

2.3 CHARACTERISTICS

A. VCTT shall have been tested against and passed the CRI Green Label Plus for Indoor Air Quality, the State of Washington Protocol for Indoor Air Quality and the Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS) Indoor Air Quality tests.

B. Face Construction

1. Construction: NO LESS THAN 100 stitches per square inch 2. Width: Six (6) feet 3. Gauge: NO LESS THAN 12th

4. Face Weight: NO MORE THAN 20 ounces Gauge

5. Pile Height Ave. No GREATER THAN 0.156 inches 6. Density: Not applicable to performance evaluation 7. Fiber System: Nylon continuous filament only 8. Dyeing Method: Solution or Yarn dyed

C. Backing System

1. Primary Tufting Substrate: Synthetic Non-woven 2. Sealant Coat (Pre-Coat): Sealant Vinyl 3. Backing Type: Closed Cell Vinyl Cushion ONLY 4. Backing Weight: 35.5 oz/sq yd 5. Backing Density: 18.5 lbs/cu ft 6. Backing Thickness: No Less Than 0.156 inch 7. Backing Compression Set: Max 10% 8. Backing Compression Deflection: Min 7 lbs at 25% 9. Installation Adhesive System: Factory supplied or applied adhesive

with no detectable VOC’s. A cured Microencapsulated Tackifier applied to the back at the time of manufacture is preferred. 10. Antimicrobial: No anti-microbial (pesticide) treatments applied in backing during manufacturing in compliance with The Healthy

School Handbook an NEA Publication. AATCC-74 should not demonstrate a zone of inhibition when tested.

11. Moisture Barrier at Seams: Moisture Penetration by Impact at SEAMS @

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09680 Additions and Renovations Carpet ENG-12-061 Page 3

10 psi: No penetration after 10,000 impacts**The British Spill Test IS NOT

an acceptable measurement for moisture barrier.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Installer must examine substrates for moisture content and other conditions under which carpeting is to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from surfaces to receive carpeting; vacuum clean immediately before installation. Check concrete surfaces to ensure no "dusting" through installed carpet; apply sealer where required to prevent dusting.

C. Refer to Section 09650 for floor leveling preparation D. Sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize possibility of damage and

soiling of carpet during remainder of construction period.

required.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet and pad; maintain uniformity of direction and lay of pile. At doors, center seams under doors; do not place seams in traffic direction at doorways. No tee seams will be allowed unless absolutely necessary. 1. Extend carpet under open-bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges

and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space. 2. Provide cut-outs where required, and bind cut edges properly where not

concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. 3. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to

substrate. 4. Expansion Joints: Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous

carpeting, provide for movement. B. Glue-Down Installation:

1. Fit sections of carpet and pad into each space prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butter cuts with seaming cement.

2. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt carpet edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Roll lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. Remove adhesive promptly from face of carpet.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove debris, sorting pieces to be saved from scraps to be disposed of. B. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove spots

and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. C. Advise Contractor of protection methods and materials needed to ensure that

carpeting will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09680 Additions and Renovations Carpet ENG-12-061 Page 4

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09900 Additions and Renovations Painting ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 09900 PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified are in addition to

shop-priming and surface treatments. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in the schedules,

except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available.

C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual, or other

code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.

B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface. 1. Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples.

B. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label with the product trade name manufacturer's instructions.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09900 Additions and Renovations Painting ENG-12-061 Page 2

C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.

D. Project Conditions: Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.

E. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).

F. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Sherwin Williams. 2. Devoe. 3. Glidden. 4. Benjamin Moore. 5. Approved Equal.

B. Paint Materials, General: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of Sherwin Williams' proprietary product names to

designate materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

D. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of standard colors.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for

compliance with requirements. Do not begin application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Coordination: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09900 Additions and Renovations Painting ENG-12-061 Page 3

1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.

C. Preparation: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved.

D. Cleaning: Clean substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

E. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,

mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white

shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime

edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.

c. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery.

3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop-coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been

damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

F. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions. 1. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as

required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.

2. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Application: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09900 Additions and Renovations Painting ENG-12-061 Page 4

1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface.

2. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.

3. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures are in place. Extend coatings in these areas to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

4. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

5. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable and before subsequent surface deterioration. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray or other applicators according to manufacturer's directions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as

recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as

recommended for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at the manufacturer's recommended

spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat to material to be painted or finished that has not been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.

G. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove

spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

H. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.

I. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore

damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 09900 Additions and Renovations Painting ENG-12-061 Page 5

3.3 SCHEDULE

A. Paint Schedule: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated:

Exterior Iron: Surface Prep: SW14 or SW15 Primer:(1 coat) Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer. (2.5 mils) Two Coats: Direct-to-Metal Enamel. (3.0 mils/coat)

Exterior Metal Doors/Frames: Surface Prep: SW 14 or SW 15 Primer:(1 coat) Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer. (2.5 mils) Two Coats: Direct-to-Metal Enamel (3.0 mils/coat).

Interior Drywall - Walls: Surface Prep: SW 8 or SW 12 Primer: (1 coat) ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer (1.1 mils). Two Coats: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel (1.6 mils/coat).

Interior Drywall - Ceilings: Surface Prep: SW 8 or SW 12 Primer: (1 coat) ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer (1.1 mils). Two Coats: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint (1.4 mils/coat).

Interior Metal: Surface Prep: SW 15 or SW 12 Primer: (1 coat) Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer. (2.5 mils) Two Coats: ProMar 200 Interior Latex SemiGloss (1.3 mils/coat).

Exterior Wood: Surface Prep: SW 23 or SW 12. Primer: (1 coat) A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer (2.3 mils) Two Coats: A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss (1.3 mils/coat). Exterior concrete: Surface Prep: SW 5, 22, 4, or 12 Primer: (1 coat) ProMar Masonry Conditioner (2.2 mils) Two Coats: A-100 Exterior Latex Flat(1.3 mils) Exterior Masonry: Surface Prep: SW 4 or SW 12 First Coat: SW Loxon Exterior Acrylic Masonry Primer, A24W300 (8 mils wet, 3.1 mils dry) Second Coat: SW A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series Third Coat: SW A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series (4 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry per coat)

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 10

SPECIALTIES

Ascension Counseling Center Section 10155 Additions and Renovations Toilet Compartments ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide Overhead-Braced and Floor-Anchored, Solid Phenolic Toilet Partitions and Privacy Screens as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein. Grab Bars provided under Toilet and Bath Accessories.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications” for supports that attach units to

overhead structural system. 2. Division 10 “Toilet and Bath Accessories” for toilet paper holders, grab

bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s detailed technical data for materials,

fabrication, and installation, including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fasteners, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of Toilet Partition and Screen assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Submit manufacturer’s color chart with manufacturer’s full range of

Standard Colors. Color shall be selected on a basis of four (4) stalls or more per color.

2. Submit certification that materials furnished comply with requirements specified.

D. Samples for Verification: 1. Submit 6” square Samples of each color and finish on same substrate

used in work, for color verification after selections have been made. 2. Submit one (1) Sample of the following:

a. Hardware (Complete) b. Pilaster (12” X 12”) c. Divider Panel (12” X 12”) d. Full High Aluminum Mounting Bracket (57.5”) e. Continuous Full High 14 Gauge Stainless Steel Hinge (57.5”)

Ascension Counseling Center Section 10155 Additions and Renovations Toilet Compartments ENG-12-061 Page 2

E. Maintenance Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s printed Instructions for Maintenance of installed Work.

F. Written Warranty 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made

without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units without field measurements. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to Established Dimensions.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle compartments as recommended by manufacturer to protect from damage.

1.7 MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s written Two (2) Part warranty: The entire Toilet Partition shall be warranted for fifteen (15) years, against breakage, corrosion and delamination, to include Hardware; replaced without charge, excluding labor. Panels, Pilasters and Doors shall be warranted for twenty five (25) years against breakage, corrosion and delamination; replaced without charge, excluding labor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. COLUMBIA PARTITIONS SUPER HD – 8433-BR, by Partition Systems, Inc., P.O. Box 1118, Columbia, S.C. 29202

B. Other manufacturers that may be submitted for prior approval include: Bobrick Washroom Equipment Ampco Bradley Accurate Partition Corporation Global Santana

For consideration, prior approval submissions must include confirmation that each component of the full assembly herein listed is available in equivalent design, construction, and quality.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide material which has been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on

Ascension Counseling Center Section 10155 Additions and Renovations Toilet Compartments ENG-12-061 Page 3

finished units are not acceptable. Solid Phenolic shall meet or exceed all requirements for Class “A” Flame Spread Rating calculated according to ASTM E-84-91A, and shall carry a UL Class “A” Fire Rating Certification.

B. Material shall be Solid Phenolic with a High Pressure Melamine matte finish surface made as an integral part of the core material. Laminated surfaces are not acceptable.

1. Doors – Minimum .75” (19 mm) Finished Thickness 2. Divider Panels – Minimum .75 (19mm) Finished Thickness 3. Pilasters – Minimum .75” (19 mm) Finished Thickness

C. Colors: To be selected by Project Architect from Manufacturer’s Standard Colors.

D. Pilaster Shoes: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304 Stainless Steel, minimum 4” high, 18 gauge, finished with #3 Directional Polish, attached with Stainless Steel Through Bolts.

E. Continuous Brackets: Full High (57.5”) Extruded 6063-T5 Aluminum with a Satin Anodized finish. The minimum weight shall be 1.685 pounds per lineal foot. Inside of opening of Bracket shall be .50” for panels, .75” for pilasters. All holes for mounting to wall and panel/pilaster shall be pre-drilled. Holes are to be spaced at 9” O.C. along the full length of the Bracket for a total of fourteen (14) holes for mounting to the wall and seven (7) holes for mounting to the panel/pilaster. Each Bracket is to have minimum wall thickness of .125”. Each Bracket is to be packaged in a separate poly tube, and is to be labeled by stock number and manufacturer.

F. Continuous Hinge: Continuous 14 Gauge Stainless Steel Hinge (57.5”). Hinge shall be 3” wide and shall have five (5) Stainless Steel wire springs for self-closing action. Pivot pin shall be .250” in diameter, and shall be made of Type 302/304 Stainless Steel. Hinges shall provide emergency access by lifting the door. Hinges shall be pre-drilled for mounting to door and pilaster. Mounting holes shall be at 9” O.C. for Through-Bolting with Stainless Steel fasteners. Each Hinge is to be packaged in a separate poly tube, and is to be labeled by stock number, manufacturer, and left or right hand.

G. Emergency Access Strike and Keeper: Heavy Duty Cast Stainless Steel with a Satin finish. The Strike and Keeper shall be 2.50” high, with the mounting holes at 1.50” O.C., and the wall thickness shall be a minimum of .125”. The Strike and Keeper shall have a slot, .80” X .29” on the top and bottom of the Strike and Keeper, to receive the Slide Latch Bar and to allow for emergency access by lifting the door. The Strike and Keeper shall have an integral rubber bumper door stop. The stock number shall be molded into the back of the Strike and Keeper for ease in identification. Each Strike and Keeper shall be packaged in a separate poly bag, and is to be labeled by stock number and manufacturer. Furnish one per door.

H. Slide Latch: Heavy Duty Cast Stainless Steel with a Satin finish. The Slide Latch shall be surface mounted. The slide bar shall be .150” thick, 1.020” wide and 3.720” long. Latch shall have an internal Stainless Steel buffering spring to prevent damage when door is inadvertently slammed against the Latch. Mounting holes are to be spaced at 3.50” O.C.. Latch knob is to be riveted to the slide bar and then welded to insure that the knob will not come off. The stock number is to molded into the back of the Slide Latch for ease in identification. Each Slide Latch shall be packaged in a separate poly bag, and is to be labeled by stock number and manufacturer. Furnish one per door.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 10155 Additions and Renovations Toilet Compartments ENG-12-061 Page 4

I. Coat Hook: Heavy Duty Cast Stainless Steel with a Satin finish. Coat Hook and Bumper shall be 2.340” high, 1.230” wide and shall protrude out from the door 3.05”. The hook portion shall have a finished diameter of .250”. The stock number shall be molded into the back of the Coat Hook and Bumper for ease in identification. Each Coat Hook and Bumper shall be packaged in a separate poly bag, and is to be labeled by stock number and manufacturer. Furnish one per dor.

J. Door Stop: Heavy Duty Cast Stainless Steel with a Satin finish. Plated Zamac Door Stops are unacceptable. Door Stop shall have a 2.125” base diameter and shall protrude 1.80” from the wall. The bumper at the end of the Door Stop shall be .250” thick. The diameter of the shaft shall be .6875”. The stock number shall be molded into the back of the Door Stop for ease in identification. Each Door Stop shall be packaged in a separate poly bag, and is to be labeled by stock number and manufacturer. Furnish one for each Disabled Accessible door.

K. Pull Handle: Heavy Duty Cast Stainless Steel with a Satin finish. Plated Zamac Door Pulls are unacceptable. Pull Handle shall protrude from the face of the door .940” and shall be 4.735” long. The Pull Handle shall have mounting holes drilled and tapped for 10/24 threads at 3.50” O.C.. The Pull Handle shall be .655” wide and shall be mounted back to back with the Slide Latch. The stock number shall be molded into the back of the Pull Handle for ease in identification. Each Pull Handle shall be packaged in a separate poly bag, and is to be labeled by stock number and manufacturer. Furnish one for each Disabled Accessible door.

L. Overhead Bracing (Headrail): Continuous Heavy Duty Extruded 6063-T5 Aluminum Headrail with Anti-Grip profile. Headrail shall have integral reinforcing channel and curtain track. Headrail shall have a Satin Anodized finish. Provide Headrail Corner Brackets, Wall Brackets, and Headrail End Caps as required. The Headrail and Headrail Brackets shall have a minimum wall height of 2”. The minimum wall thickness of the Headrail and Headrail Brackets shall be .125”. Each Headrail Bracket is to be packaged in a separate poly bag, and is to be labeled by stock number and manufacturer.

M. Anchorages and Fasteners: All Fasteners shall be Chrome Plated Brass with theft proof heads, Through-Bolted unless noted otherwise. No chrome plated steel will be acceptable.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens and pilasters fabricated for partition system, complete with all accessories and hardware listed above and as required for installation of fully functional system, unless otherwise noted. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive partition-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars as indicated.

B. Overhead-Braced and Floor-Anchored Partitions: 1. Furnish Heavy Duty Cast Stainless Steel “Z” Bars, complete with

Stainless Steel threaded rods, lock washers and leveling-adjusting nuts at pilaster, to permit structural connection at floor.

2. Make provision for setting and securing continuous Extruded Aluminum Anti-Grip Headrail at top of each pilaster.

3. Furnish Stainless Steel Shoe at each pilaster to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 10155 Additions and Renovations Toilet Compartments ENG-12-061 Page 5

C. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24” (610 mm) wide in-swinging doors for standard Toilet Partitions and 36” (914 mm) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32” (813 mm) wide clear opening for Partitions indicated to be Handicapped Accessible.

D. Floor Anchored Privacy Screens: Furnish Privacy Screens consisting of a pilaster and a panel of the same construction and finish as the Toilet Partitions. Furnish in accordance with the drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Install Partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than .50” (13 mm) between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1.0” (25 mm) between panels and walls. No evidence of drilling, cutting and patching shall be visible in finished work.

B. Attach Continuous Wall Brackets to the wall with the following: 1. At solid masonry: #14 x 1.50” long Stainless Steel Phillips Pan Head

Screws and Plastic #14/16 Anchors at 9” O.C. vertical spacing. 2. At cavity masonry: .25” diameter x required length Stainless Steel toggle

bolts at 9” O.C. vertical spacing. C. Overhead-Braced and Floor-Anchored Partitions: Secure pilasters to floor and

level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous Headrail to each pilaster with not less than two (2) Through-Bolted Stainless Steel fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

D. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer’s written instructions and to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact.

3.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Mount accessories to Partition units in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer’s written instructions for proper operation.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure Toilet Partitions and Screens are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 10426 Additions and Renovations Signage and Graphics ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 10426 SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Aluminum numbers on property monument sign. 1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide three copies of manufacturer’s product data, color selection samples. B. Provide drawing of elevation of property monument with numbers laid out to scale

for approval. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in installing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of the work of this section with a minimum ten years documented experience.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s limited lifetime warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Best Manufacturing Sign Systems B. Sign International

C. Approved Equal

2.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. (Plaque) System: Equal to “Best” HC300 ADA System 1. Copy: 5/8”, raised. 2. Border: 3/8”, raised. 3. Corners: 1/2”, radiused 4. Thickness: 1/8”. 5. Color: Selected from manufacturer’s standards 6. Attachment: holes and screws standard mounting.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 10426 Additions and Renovations Signage and Graphics ENG-12-061 Page 2

2.3 STYLES

A. (Plaque Style 1) 6” x 8” 1. Restroom signage with Text and Braille as required.

B. (Plaque Style 2) 6” x 6” 1. Exit signage with Text and Braille as required.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Verify that substrate surface is flat with maximum variation in ¼” in 10ft are ready to receive work.

B. Clean surface to receive numbers. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install numbers as appropriate for mounting surface. B. Use mounting material and hardware appropriate for mounting surface and as

recommended by sign manufacturer.

3.3 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

A. Provide at the following locations: 1. Style 1 at all RESTROOMS. 2. Style 2 at all required EXITS.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 10520 Additions and Renovations Fire Protection Specialties ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: Include rough-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods,

relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, door construction, panel style, and materials.

a. Show location of knockouts for hose valves. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing full range of

colors, textures, and patterns available for each finish indicated or exposed to view.

B. Coordination: Verify that cabinets are sized to accommodate type and capacity of extinguishers indicated.

C. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher.

D. FM-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher with FM marking.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Provide fire extinguishers for each cabinet and for other locations

indicated. 1. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 2A-10-B:C, Model MP5, 5-lb

nominal capacity, in enameled steel container. 2. Wet Chemical Type K: Model: UL-Rated Type K, 6 liter capacity.

B. Mounting Brackets: Provide brackets of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in plated finish.

2.2 EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Cabinet Construction: Box with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: UL listed with UL listing mark with fire-resistance rating of wall where it is installed.

2. Cabinet Type: Suitable for containing the following: a. Fire extinguisher. 3. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the mounting indicated: a. Recessed: Fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit trim style. 4. Trim Style: One piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. a. Trimless: Surface of surrounding wall flush with exterior surface of cabinet

frame and door, without overlapping trim. Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, to act as plaster stop.

Ascension Counseling Center Section 10520 Additions and Renovations Fire Protection Specialties ENG-12-061 Page 2

B. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Aluminum: Flush, hollow construction. 2. Door Glazing: Fully tempered float glass complying with ASTM C 1048,

Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, Kind FT, and Class as follows: a. Class 1 (clear). 3. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with FIRE EXTINGUISHER lettering applied to

door. Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location.

a. Application Process: Silk screen. C. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with FIRE EXTINGUISHER in red letter

decals applied to wall surface. Letter size, style, and location as selected by Architect.

D. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design. 1. Frameless Tempered Full-Glass Panel: Clear, tempered float glass with polished

edges and inside surface etched with lettering, or design indicated. E. Door Hardware: Provide door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type,

trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide lever handle with cam-action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.

F. Cabinet Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual." Protect exposed finishes from damage by application of temporary strippable covering prior to shipment.

G. Aluminum Cabinet Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by Aluminum Association. 1. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 complying with AAMA 606.1

or AAMA 608.1. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation: Follow manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Install at heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable

regulations of governing authorities. 1. Prepare wall recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and

style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and

plumb.

END OF SECTION

Ascension Counseling Center Section 10800 Additions and Renovations Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories ENG-12-061 Page 1

SECTION 10800 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Submittals: Manufacturer's product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting methods, specified options, and finishes.

B. Samples: Full-size samples of the following toilet accessory items to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the Work:

1. Stainless steel framed mirror unit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide toilet accessories by the following

manufacturer: 1. Bobrick Washroom Accessories 2.2 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES A. Mirror: Bobrick B-165 2436 framed mirror as indicated on Drawings. B. Soap Dispenser: Bobrick B-2111 Wall Mounted Soap Dispenser as indicated on

Drawings. C. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Bobrick B-2730 Classic Series Single Roll surface

mounted toilet tissue dispenser as indicated on Drawings. D. Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle: Bobrick B-369 Classic Series

combination recessed paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle as indicated on Drawings.

E. Stainless Steel Grab Bars: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than .050 inch (18 gage) and as follows and as indicated on Drawings:

1. Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorages. 2. Clearance: 1-1/2-inch clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar. 3. Gripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish. 4. Heavy-Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1-1/2 inches. 5. Length: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Steel Hooks: Bobrick B-672 Classic Series Double Robe Hook at interior side of TOILET room doors.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' printed installation instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit

Ascension Counseling Center Section 10800 Additions and Renovations Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories ENG-12-061 Page 2

manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

1. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved.

2. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. 3. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's

recommendations.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 11

EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 12

FURNISHINGS

(NOT USED)

DIVISION 13

SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

(NOT USED)

DIVISION 14

CONVEYING SYSTEMS

(NOT USED)

DIVISION 15

MECHANICAL

(NOT USED)

DIVISION 16

ELECTRICAL

(NOT USED)